Manual Vauxhall Signum 2007 (page 295 of 310) (English)

529282

295

Zoom out

Zoom in

1/310

SIGNUM

©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.

Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts,

is not permitted without prior written consent from

Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly

reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this

manual are based on the latest production information

available at the time of publication.

The right is reserved to make changes at any time without

notice.

Edition: July 2007.

TS 1577-A-08

SIGNUM

Operation, Safety and Maintenance

Owner’s Manual

VAUXHALL Signum

Operation, Safety, Maintenance

Data specific to your vehicle

Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it easily accessible.

This information is available under the section "Technical data" as well as on the identification plate and in the Service Booklet.

Fuel

Designation

Engine oil

Grade

Viscosity

Tyre pressure

Tyre size with up to 4 persons with full load

Summer tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Winter tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Weights

Permissible gross vehicle weight

– EC kerb weight

=Loading

Your Signum

is an intelligent combination of forward-

looking technology, impressive safety,

environmental friendliness and economy.

It now lies with you to drive your vehicle

safely and ensure that it performs

perfectly. This Owner’s Manual provides

you with all the necessary information to

that end.

Make sure your passengers are aware of

the possible risk of accident and injury

which may result from improper use of the

vehicle.

You must always comply with the specific

laws of the country that you are travelling

through. These laws may differ from the

information in this Owner’s Manual.

When this Manual refers to a workshop

visit, we recommend your Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer.

All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers provide

first-class service at reasonable prices.

You will receive quick, reliable and

individual service.

Experienced mechanics, trained by

Vauxhall, work according to specific

Vauxhall instructions.

The Owner’s Manual should always be kept

in the vehicle: ready to hand in the glove

compartment.

Make use of the Owner’s Manual:

z Its "In Brief" section will give you an initial

overview.

z The table of contents at the beginning of

the Owner’s Manual and within the

individual chapters will show you where

everything is.

z Its index will help you find what you

want.

z It will familiarise you with the

sophisticated technology.

z It will increase your pleasure in your

vehicle.

z It will help you to handle your vehicle

expertly.

The Owner’s Manual is designed to be

clearly laid-out and easily understood.

This symbol signifies:

6 Continue reading on next page.

3 Items marked with an asterisk are not

fitted to all vehicles (model variants,

engine options, models specific to one

country, optional equipment, Genuine

Vauxhall Parts and Accessories).

Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as

points of reference or indicate some action

to be performed.

Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a

reaction or a second action to be

performed.

Direction references such as left or right,

forwards or backwards in the descriptions

always indicate the direction of travel.

Thank you for choosing a Vauxhall. We

wish you many hours of pleasurable

driving.

Your Vauxhall Team

9 Warning

Text marked 9 Warning provides

information on risk of accident or injury.

Disregard of the instructions may lead to

injuries or endanger life. Inform your

passengers accordingly.

Contents

Commitment to customer

satisfaction:

Our aim: to keep you happy with your

vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers

offer first-class service at competitive

prices. Experienced, factory-trained

technicians work according to factory

instructions. Your Authorised Repairer can

supply you with GENUINE VAUXHALL-

APPROVED PARTS, which have undergone

stringent quality and precision checks, and

of course useful and attractive

VAUXHALL-APPROVED ACCESSORIES.

Our name is your guarantee!

For details of the

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer Network,

please ring this number; 0845 090 2044

In brief ....................................................... 2

Keys, doors, windows, sun roof ............ 26

Seats, interior .......................................... 48

Instruments, controls ............................. 98

Lighting ................................................. 128

Infotainment system ........................... 137

Climate control .................................... 140

Driving and operation ........................ 168

Self-help, vehicle care .......................... 226

Service plan, maintenance ................. 264

Technical data .................................... 278

Index ...................................................... 298

2 In brief

In brief

To unlock and open vehicle:

Press button q, pull door handle

6 Door locks, child safety locks –

see page 37,

keys – see page 26,

electronic immobiliser – see page 27,

remote control – see page 28,

central locking – see page 30,

anti-theft locking system 3 – see page 30,

Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 35.

To unlock and open the luggage

compartment:

Press button q on remote control

and pull catch beneath handle

6 Remote control – see page 28, central

locking – see page 30,

Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 35.

3In brief

To adjust front seats:

Pull handle, slide seat,

release handle

6 Seats – see page 48,

seat position – see page 50,

electrically adjustable front seats –

see page 50,

adjusting rear seats – see page 56.

To adjust front seat backrests:

Turn handwheel

Move backrest to suit seating position.

Do not lean on seat backrest whilst

adjusting it.

6 Seats – see page 48,

seat position – see page 50,

folding over front passenger seat

backrest – see page 67,

electrically adjustable front seats –

see page 50,

adjusting rear seats – see page 56.

To adjust front seat height 3:

Operate lever on outboard side of

seat

Pump action of lever

6 Seats – see page 48,

seat position – see page 50,

electrically adjustable front seats

– see page 50.

9 Warning

Important: Do not sit nearer than 10

inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to

permit safe airbag deployment.

Upwards: Seat higher

Downwards: Seat lower

4 In brief

Adjusting front seat inclination 3:

Operate front lever on outboard

side of seat

Pump action of lever

6 Seats – see page 48,

seat position – see page 50,

electrically adjustable front seats –

see page 50.

Electric seat adjustment 3:

Operate switch on outboard side

of seat

6 Seats – see page 48,

seat position – see page 51,

electrically adjustable front seats –

see page 50.

To adjust head restraint height of

front and rear outboard seats 3:

Press button to release,

adjust height,

engage in position

6 Head restraints – see page 53,

head restraint position – see page 55,

adjusting centre rear head restraint –

see page 55.

Upwards: Seat steeper

Downwards: Seat flatter

1 Adjusting the longitudinal position

2 Adjusting the inclination

3 Height adjustment

4 Seat backrest adjustment

5 Lumbar support 3

5In brief

To adjust head restraint angle of

front and outboard rear seats 3:

Swivel bottom edge of head

restraint forward or rearward

6 Head restraints – see page 53,

head restraint position – see page 54,

rear head restraints – see page 54.

To put on seat belt:

Pull out seat belt without

jerking it, pass it over

the shoulder and click into

the belt buckle

The seat belt must not be twisted at any

point. The lap belt must lie snugly against

the body. The backrests must not be tilted

back too far (recommended maximum

tilting angle approx. 25 °).

To release belt, press red button on belt

buckle.

6 Three-point seat belts – see page 71,

airbag systems 3 – see page 81,

seat position – see page 50.

Adjusting interior mirror:

Swivel mirror housing

Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing

to reduce dazzle at night.

6 Mirror – see page 41,

automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror – see

page 41.

6 In brief

To adjust exterior mirrors:

Four-way switch in driver’s door

If the outer mirror switch is pressed 1 the

four-way switch operates the driver and

front passenger mirrors 3, and if the inner

mirror switch is pressed 2 it only operates

the front passenger mirror.

6 Mirrors – see page 40,

aspherical exterior mirrors 3 – see page 40,

automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirrors –

see page 41,

heated exterior mirrors – see page 13,

electric seat adjustment 3 – see page 50.

Steering column lock and ignition:

Turn key to position 1;

move steering wheel a little to

release steering lock

Positions:

6 Starting – page 15,

electronic immobiliser – page 27,

parking the vehicle – page 16.

Steering wheel adjustment 3:

Move lever down,

adjust height and distance,

move lever up,

engage

Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is

stationary and steering column lock is

released.

6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 81.

0 = Ignition off

1 = Steering free, ignition off

2 = Ignition on, for diesel engine:

preheating

3=Starting

7In brief

Turn light switch:

Push button:

6 Lighting – see page 128,

headlight control indicator

– see pages 16, 126.

Headlight flash, main beam and

dipped beam:

6 Main beam, headlight flash

– see page 129.

Switch on turn signal lights:

6 Turn signal – see page130.

7 =Off

8 = Parking lights

9 = Dipped or main beam

AUTO = Automatic dipped

beam activation

> =Fog lights 3

r = Fog tail light

Headlight

flash = Pull stalk

towards

steering wheel

Main beam = Stalk forwards

Dipped beam = Lever forward

again or toward

steering wheel

Right = Stalk up

Left = Stalk down

8 In brief

9In brief

Page

1 Side air vents ..................................142

2 Front passenger airbag .................. 81

3 Centre air vents ............................. 142

4 Infotainment system 3 ................. 137

5 Central information display for

time, date, outside temperature

Infotainment System 3,

Check-Control 3,

Trip computer 3,

Automatic air conditioning 3 ...... 108

6 Turn signal lights................................. 7

Headlight flash,

Dipped beam, main beam ................ 7

Door-to-door light function 3 .......133

Parking lights ................................. 134

Cruise control 3 .............................. 200

7 Steering wheel remote control 3 ..137

8 Instruments ....................................... 98

9 Horn .................................................. 11

Driver’s Airbag ................................ 81

Page

10 Windscreen wiper,

Windscreen wash system,

headlight wash system 3 and

rear window wash system 3 ........... 12

11 Parking lights, dipped beam ........ 128

Instrument illumination ................. 134

Fog tail light ................................... 131

Fog lights 3 .................................... 130

Headlight range adjustment 3 ..... 131

12 Unlocking the bonnet.................... 226

13 Ignition lock with steering

column lock ....................................... 6

14 Accelerator pedal ......................... 184

15 Brake pedal ........................... 185, 208

16 Steering wheel adjustment .............. 6

17 Clutch pedal 3 ............................... 185

18 Right heated seat 3 and

seat climate control 3 ................... 144

Vauxhall alarm system 3 ............... 35

SPORT mode 3 ............................. 198

19 Ashtray 3 ........................................ 95

Page

20 Stowage compartment

with AUX input 3 .......................... 138

21 Cigarette lighter 3 or socket 3 ...... 94

22 Climate control ............................. 140

23 Heated seat (left) 3 or

seat climate control 3 .................. 144

Hazard warning lights ................... 11

Parking distance sensor 3 ........... 202

24 Glove compartment ............... 96, 143

25 Fuse box ......................................... 243

10 In brief

Control indicators

Turn signal lights,

see pages 7, 98.

Engine oil pressure,

see page 98.

Brake system, clutch system,

see pages 99, 208, 272.

Alternator,

see page 99.

Airbag systems, belt tensioners,

see pages 72, 81.

Coolant temperature,

see pages 100, 106.

Exterior lights,

see pages 100, 128.

Sport program of automatic

transmission 3,

see pages 171, 178.

Winter program of automatic

transmission 3 or Easytronic 3,

see pages 172, 180.

(

Door open 3,

see page 100.

Easytronic 3, starting the

engine 3,

see page 169.

Bulb replacement 3,

see pages 100, 249.

Open luggage compartment,

see pages 34, 101.

Fog lights 3,

see pages 101, 130.

Main beam,

see pages 7, 101.

Fog tail light,

see pages 101, 130.

Parking distance sensor 3,

fault,

see page 202.

Continuous Damping Control 3,

fault,

see page 198.

Seat belt 3,

see page 101.

Engine electronics, immobiliser,

transmission electronics 3,

diesel fuel filter 3, fault,

see pages 101, 182, 192.

Preheating system 3,

diesel particle filter 3,

see page 102.

H Coolant level,

see pages 102, 271.

Anti-lock Braking System,

see page 210.

Electro-hydraulic power

assisted steering, fault,

see page 103.

Electronic Stability Program

(ESP®

Plus

) 3,

see page 196.

Seat occupancy recognition 3,

see page 87.

S Engine oil level,

see pages 103, 268.

Cruise control 3,

see page 200.

Fuel level,

see pages 103, 106, 189.

Exhaust gases 3,

see pages 104, 192.

Tyre pressure monitoring

system 3,

see pages 104, 204.

Adaptive Forward Lighting

(AFL) 3, fault,

see pages 104, 132.

11In brief

Hazard warning lights:

6 Hazard warning lights – page 131.

To operate horn:

Press j in middle of steering

wheel

6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 81,

remote control from steering wheel 3 –

see page 137.

Windscreen wiper:

Gently tap lever upwards

Press the stalk down from position §:

Single swipe.

6 Windscreen wipers – see page 126,

adjustable wipe interval 3 – see page 126,

wiper blades – see pages 273, 274,

car care – see page 260.

On = Press ¨

Off = Press

¨ again

§ =Off

$ = Adjustable timed interval

wipe

% =Slow

& =Fast

12 In brief

Automatic wiping with rain

sensor 3:

Gently tap stalk upwards

Automatic wiping $:

6 Windscreen wiper – see page 126,

wiper blades – see pages 273, 274,

car care – see page 260.

Operating windscreen and

headlight wash systems 3:

Pull stalk towards steering wheel

6 Windscreen wash system and headlight

wash system – see page 127, further notes

– see pages 260, 273.

Operating rear screen wiper 3

and wash system 3:

6 Rear screen wash/wipe system

– see page 127,

further notes – see pages 260, 273.

$ = Automatic wiping with

rain sensor

§ =Off

Low sensitivity: To the left

High sensitivity: To the right

Wipers on = Stalk forwards

Wipers off = Stalk forwards

again

Washing = Hold stalk pushed

fully forwards

13In brief

Heated rear window,

heated exterior mirrors:

6 Air conditioning – see page 140,

heated rear window – see page 143.

To demist or defrost windows:

Set air distribution to l,

rotary switch for temperature and

air flow clockwise;

Air conditioning system 3:

Press buttons n and V;

Automatic climate

control system 3:

Press buttons n and V,

turn rotary switch for

temperature clockwise,

air flow to A;

Climate control system 3:

Press button V

6 Climate control – see page 140.

Setting automatic mode of

climate control system 3:

Press AUTO button,

set temperature for driver and

passenger sides using left and

right rotary knobs

6 Climate control system 3 – see page 156.

On = Press Ü

Off = Press Ü again

14 In brief

Manual transmission:

Reverse gear: with vehicle stationary, pull

the ring up three seconds after

de-clutching and engage gear.

If the gear does not engage, set the lever in

neutral, release the clutch pedal and

depress again; then repeat gear selection.

Easytronic 3:

The selector lever must always be moved in

the appropriate direction as far as it will

go. Upon release, it automatically returns

to the centre position. Pay heed to the

gear/mode indicator in the transmission

display.

The foot brake must be depressed when

starting.

6 Easytronic 3 – see page 168.

Automatic transmission 3:

Selector lever in D to the left:

Manual mode

P or N must be engaged when starting.

N=Idling

o = Drive position

+ = Higher gear

-=Lower gear

A/M = Switch between

automatic and manual

mode

R=Reverse gear (with

selector lever lock)

P=Park position

R = Reverse gear

N = Neutral position (idling)

D = Automatic gear selection

+ = Higher gear

- = Lower gear

15In brief

In order to leave P switch on ignition,

operate foot brake and press button on

selector lever.

To engage P or R, push button on selector

lever.

6 Automatic transmission 3 – see

page 176.

Before starting off, check:

z Tyre pressure and condition – see

pages 204, 211, 288.

z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine

compartment – see pages 267 to 275.

z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting

and number plates are free from dirt,

snow and ice and operational.

z Do not place any objects in front of the

rear window, on the instrument panel or

in the area in which the airbags inflate.

z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are

correctly adjusted.

z Brake function.

To start engine:

Operate clutch and brake,

automatic transmission 3

in P or N,

Easytronic 3: Depress brake,

do not accelerate;

Petrol engine: Turn key to 3;

Diesel engine: Turn key to 2,

when control indicator !

goes out

, turn key to 3;

release key once engine is

running

To restart or switch off the engine, turn key

back to 0.

To switch on the ignition, only turn the key

to 2.

6 Electronic immobiliser – see page 27,

diesel fuel system – see page 226.

P Only with vehicle stationary, apply

handbrake beforehand

R Only if vehicle is stationary

Preheating system switches on only if outside

temperature is low.

16 In brief

Releasing the hand brake:

Raise lever slightly,

press release button,

lower lever fully

6 Handbrake – see page 209.

Parking the vehicle

z Always apply the handbrake firmly

without actuating the release knob; to

do this fold up the armrest 3. Apply as

fully as possible on an uphill or downhill

incline. To reduce the amount of force

required to activate the brake, depress

the foot brake at the same time.

z Switch off the engine - to do this, turn the

ignition key to 0. Remove the ignition key

and turn the steering wheel until the

steering lock (anti-theft protection)

engages. In cars with automatic

transmission 3, the key can only be

removed when the selector lever is in P.

z If the vehicle is on the flat or an uphill

incline engage first gear before

switching off the ignition if you have

manual transmission or Easytronic 3;

if the vehicle has automatic

transmission 3, place the selector

lever in P. On an uphill incline also turn

the front wheels away from the kerb.

If the vehicle is on a downhill incline,

engage reverse gear before switching off

the ignition if you have manual

transmission or Easytronic 3; if the

vehicle has automatic transmission 3,

place the selector lever in P. Also turn the

front wheels towards the kerb.

z Lock the doors and luggage

compartment by pressing button p on

the remote control. To activate the

anti-theft locking system 3 and

anti-theft warning system 3, press

button p twice.

Advice when parking:

z Do not park vehicle on easily ignitable

surfaces, since the hot exhaust system

temperatures could cause the surface to

ignite.

z On vehicles with Easytronic 3 control

indicator R flashes for a few seconds

after the ignition is switched off if the

hand brake has not been applied – see

page 174.

z Closing windows and sun roof 3.

z The engine cooling fans may run after

the engine has been switched off – see

page 267.

6 Remote control – see page 28, central

locking – see page 30,

Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 35,

vehicle decommissioning – see page 277.

17In brief

That was a brief overview of the

most important information for

your first trip in your vehicle.

The other pages of this chapter

contain a summary of the

interesting functions in your

vehicle.

The remaining chapters of the

Owner’s Manual contain

important information on

operation, safety and

maintenance as well as a

complete index.

18 In brief

Airbag System

The airbag system consists of several

separate systems.

Front airbag system

The front airbag system will be triggered in

the event of a serious accident involving a

frontal impact and forms safety cushions

for the driver and front passenger. The

forward movement of the driver and front

passenger is checked and the risk of

injuries to the upper body and head

thereby substantially reduced.

Side airbag system 3

The side airbag system triggers when a

side-on collision occurs and provides a

safety barrier for the driver and/or

passenger in the respective front door

area. This reduces the risk of injury to the

upper body considerably in case of a side

impact.

Curtain airbag system 3

The curtain airbag system triggers in case

of a side-on collision and provides a safety

barrier in the head area on the respective

side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of

injury to the head considerably in case of a

side-on collision.

6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 80.

19In brief

Active head restraints 3 at front

seats

In the event of a rear-end impact, the

active head restraints tilt forward a little.

The head is more effectively supported by

the head restraint and the danger of

injuries caused by whiplash in the area of

the neck is reduced.

Active head restraints are identified by the

lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint

guide sleeves.

6 Head restraints – see page 53.

Operating menus in the

information display 3

Menu options are selected using menus

and using the buttons/four-way button

or the multifunction button of the

Infotainment system 3 or the left-hand

adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.

The respective menu options are shown on

the display.

To select with four-way button:

Press the four-way button up, down, right

or left.

Selection using multifunction button: rotate

and press multifunction button.

To exit a menu, turn the multifunction

button left or right to Return or Main and

select.

20 In brief

Selection using left-hand adjuster wheel on

steering wheel: rotate and press adjuster

wheel.

6 Info Display – see page 108.

Trip computer 3

The trip computers provide information on

driving data, which is continually recorded

and evaluated electronically.

Functions:

z Range

z Instantaneous consumption

z Distance travelled

z Average speed

z Effective consumption

z Average consumption

z Stop watch

z Tyre pressure 3

6 Trip computer 3 – see pages 114, 120.

Check control 3

The check control software monitors

z Fluid levels

z Tyre pressure 3

z Remote control battery

z Vauxhall alarm system 3

z Important exterior lighting lights,

including cables and fuses.

6 Check control 3 – page 124.

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1 All values

BC 2

257.0 miles

Timer

Ø40mph

Tyres

11.0 gals

Ø 7.0 miles/gal

Coolant level

check

21In brief

Remote control on steering

wheel 3

The functions of the infotainment system 3

and the information display can be

operated with the buttons and adjuster

wheels on the steering wheel.

Further information is available in the

infotainment system operating

instructions.

6 Remote control on steering wheel 3

– see page 137,

Infotainment system – see pages 108, 137.

Twin Audio 3

Twin Audio allows rear seat occupants the

choice between the audio source played on

the infotainment system or a separate

audio source.

Only an audio source that is not currently

active on the infotainment system can be

controlled using Twin Audio.

Two headphone connections are available,

with separate volume controls.

Further information is available in the

infotainment system operating

instructions.

6 Twin Audio 3 – see page 138.

Parking distance sensor 3

When reverse gear is selected, the parking

distance sensor switches itself on

automatically.

The parking distance sensor can also be

activated at speeds of less than 15 mph

(25 km/h) by pressing the

r button on

the instrument panel.

If the vehicle approaches an obstacle to

the front or rear, an series of signals is

sounded in the vehicle interior. The interval

between the signals becomes shorter as

the distance is reduced. If the distance is

less than 30 cm, the signal will be

continuous.

6 Parking distance sensor 3

– see page 202.

22 In brief

Rear seats

To adjust outboard seats

z Pull handle beneath seat.

z Slide seat forward or rearward.

z Release handle and audibly engage seat

in position.

To adjust or fold outboard seat backrest

z When folding the seat, guide the seat

belt through the side retainer.

z Pull handle on outboard side of seat.

z Adjust backrest forward or rearward or

until it engages on the seat cushion.

Folding the centre seat cushion

z Pull handle beneath seat.

z Raise the seat.

z Fold the seat rearward 180° until the

cushion points down.

6 Rear seats – see page 56.

23In brief

Travel Assistant 3

The Travel Assistant Contains

z Armrest

z Stowage compartments

z Waste container

z Drink holders

z Accessory sockets

z Connection console

e.g. for DVD-player 3

z Electric cool box

z Tables

z Twin Audio (rear audio module) 3 or

stowage compartment

The Travel Assistant is installed on a

console above the middle seat in the rear.

6 Travel Assistant 3 – see page 58.

Adaptive Forward Lighting

(AFL) 3

On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights,

improves illumination of

z curves (curve lighting)

z intersections and tight turns (turn

lighting)

Curve lighting

The Xenon light beam pivots based on

steering wheel position and speed (from

approx. 6 mph /10 km/h).

The headlights shine at an angle of up

to 15° to the right or left of the direction of

travel.

Turn lighting

An additional light comes on at certain

steering wheel settings (after approx. 90°),

turn signal settings and speeds (up to

approx. 25 mph / 40 km/h).

The light beam projects at a 90° angle to

the left or right of the vehicle up to a

distance of approx. 30 metres.

Motorway lighting

At higher speeds and continuous straight

ahead travel, the dipped beam

automatically raises slightly, thereby

increasing headlight range.

6 Adaptive forward lighting 3

– see page 132.

24 In brief

SPORT mode 3

To activate

Press the SPORT button. The LED in the

button illuminates.

SPORT mode is used to change

damping 3, steering 3, throttle application

and the shifting times and shifting points

for Easytronic 3 and automatic

transmission 3 while driving.

Damping and steering 3 become more

direct and provide better contact with the

road surface. The engine reacts more

quickly to accelerator movements.

With automatic transmission 3, the shift

times are reduced and gear changes occur

at higher engine speeds (not when cruise

control 3 is active).

6 Sport mode 3 – see page 198.

Tyre pressure monitoring

system 3

The tyre pressure monitoring system

continuously monitors the pressure of all

four tyres while the vehicle is being driven.

A pressure sensor is installed in each wheel.

The inflation pressures of the individual

tyres are transmitted to a controller, where

they are compared.

The current tyre pressures can be

displayed on the graphical information

display or the colour information display 3.

Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in

the form of messages on the information

display whilst driving.

6 Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 –

see page 204.

Ü Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

25In brief

Diesel particle filter 3

The diesel particle filter system removes

polluting soot particles out of the engine

exhaust gases. The system includes a

self-cleaning function that operates

automatically while driving. The filter is

cleaned by burning the trapped soot

particles at a high temperature. There may

be an increase in fuel consumption,

exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan

operation 3 during the self-cleaning

operation.

The self-cleaning function can not operate

automatically during certain driving

situations where the engine does not reach

its normal operating temperature. An

example of this would be driving only short

distances in cold weather.

If the filter needs cleaning and recent

driving situations did not allow the function

to automatically operate, then the control

indicator

! will flash. If this occurs, then

you may continue to drive the vehicle

normally. The vehicle will not be damaged

and does not require service.

The self-cleaning function will

automatically operate while driving after

the engine has reached its normal

operating temperature. The control

indicator

! will continue to flash until the

self-cleaning operation is complete. This

may take up to 20 minutes of driving. The

time will be shorter at higher vehicle

speeds.

6 Diesel particle filter – see page 194.

26 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Keys, doors, windows,

sun roof

Replacement keys

The key number is specified in the vehicle

documents and in the Car Pass 3.

The key is a constituent of the electronic

immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer guarantees problem-

free operation of the electronic

immobiliser.

Keep the spare key in a safe spot.

Locks, see page 262.

Car Pass 3

The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s

data and should therefore not be kept in

the vehicle.

Have your Car Pass on hand when

consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Key with foldaway key section 3

Press button to extend. Press button to

retract and audibly engage key section.

Replacement keys ............................... 26

Car Pass 3............................................ 26

Key with foldaway key section 3 ....... 26

Electronic immobiliser.......................... 27

Store and activate personal vehicle

settings using the remote control .... 28

Remote control .................................... 28

Central locking system ........................ 30

Fault when locking or unlocking......... 33

Luggage compartment....................... 34

Vauxhall alarm system 3.................... 35

Child safety locks................................. 37

Universal remote control in mirror

housing 3........................................... 38

Exterior mirrors..................................... 40

Interior mirror ....................................... 41

Electric windows................................... 42

Windows in rear doors ........................ 44

Sun roof 3 ............................................ 45

Roller blinds at rear door windows 3. 47

27Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Electronic immobiliser

The system checks whether the vehicle may

be started using the key that has been

inserted. If the key is recognised as

"authorised" the vehicle can be started.

The check is carried out via a transponder

in the key.

The electronic immobiliser activates

automatically when the key is removed

from the ignition switch.

The code number of the electronic

immobiliser is given in the Car Pass.

Control indicator for immobiliser

Control indicator A illuminates briefly

when the ignition is switched on.

If the control indicator flashes when the

ignition is on, there is a fault in the system;

the engine cannot be started. Switch off

the ignition and then repeat the start

attempt.

If the control indicator A continues to

flash, try to start the engine using the

second key and contact a workshop for

assistance.

If control indicator A illuminates after the

engine is started, there is a fault in the

engine electronics or transmission

electronics 3 (see pages 174, 182, 192) or

there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3, see

page 270.

Note

The immobiliser does not lock the doors.

Therefore, after leaving the vehicle always

lock it and switch on the Vauxhall alarm

system 3 – see pages 30, 35.

28 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Store and activate personal

vehicle settings using the remote

control

The last settings selected for

z the instrument illumination,

z the central locking,

z the memory function 3 for driver’s seat

and mirror,

z the climate control system 3

are automatically stored depending on the

vehicle key used.

Different settings are stored for each

remote control. Use of a remote control will

activate the settings associated with it.

The settings for five remote controls can be

stored.

Remote control

The remote control is integrated in the key.

Used to operate:

z central locking system,

z mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,

z Vauxhall alarm system 3,

z tailgate,

In addition, electric windows 3 can be

closed using the remote control. The

electric sun roof 3 can be closed using the

remote control.

The remote control has a range of approx.

5 metres. This range can be affected by

outside influences. Aim the remote control

at the vehicle to operate.

Handle the remote control with care,

protect it from moisture and high

temperatures and avoid unnecessary

operation.

The hazard warning lights come on to

indicate that the remote control is

operational.

Central locking system,

see page 30.

Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,

see page 30.

Tailgate,

see page 34.

Vauxhall alarm system 3,

see page 35.

Electric windows 3,

see page 42.

Electrically operated sun roof 3,

see page 45.

29Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Fault

If the central locking system cannot be

operated with the remote control, it may be

due to the following:

z The range of the remote control has

been exceeded.

z Remote control battery voltage is too

low. Battery replacement - see next

page.

z Frequent, repeated operation of the

remote control outside the reception

range of the vehicle (e.g. too far from

vehicle, remote control is then no longer

recognised). Remote control

synchronisation – see next page.

z If the central locking system is

overloaded as a result of repeated

operation at short intervals. The power

supply is cut off for a brief period.

z Interference from higher-power radio

waves from other sources.

To eliminate the cause of a fault, we

recommend contacting a workshop for

assistance.

Manual unlocking and locking using the

vehicle key, see page 33.

Remote control battery replacement

Replace the battery as soon as the range

of the remote control begins to shrink.

Extending the key – see page 26.

Open the remote control. Replace the

battery (battery type – see page 293),

noting installation position. Close the

remote control.

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries

in accordance with environmental

protection regulations.

Remote control synchronisation

After a battery change, unlock door with

key in lock, see page 33. Inserting the key

into the lock synchronises the remote

control.

30 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Central locking system

For doors, boot lid/tailgate and tank flap.

To unlock

Press button q on remote control.

To lock

Press button p on remote control.

Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3

All doors must be closed. Press button p

on remote control again no more than

15 seconds after locking.

Lock buttons on all doors are positioned

such that doors cannot be opened.

If the ignition was on, the driver’s door

must be opened and closed once so that

the vehicle can be secured.

9 Warning

Do not use the system if there are people

in the vehicle! The doors cannot be

unlocked from inside.

31Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Programming unlocking mode

When the vehicle is delivered from the

factory, the remote control is preset so that

a single press of the q button opens all of

the doors and the luggage compartment.

The unit can be configured so that a single

press of the q button unlocks the entire

vehicle or just the driver’s door.

Change to presetting:

Hold button q on the remote control and

button

m in the driver’s door depressed

simultaneously until a double buzzer

sounds. Afterwards, only the driver’s door

will be unlocked when button q is pressed

once.

The entire vehicle is then unlocked by

pressing button q on the remote control

twice.

To restore the original settings, hold

button q of the remote control and

button

m in the driver’s door depressed

simultaneously until a buzzer sounds.

The current setting is stored for the remote

control, see page 28.

Central locking switch for locking and

unlocking the doors from inside the

vehicle

Press button

m in the driver’s door: Doors

and luggage compartment are locked.

Press button

) in the driver’s door: Doors

and luggage compartment are unlocked.

When the mechanical anti-theft locking

system is active 3, see page 30, the doors

cannot be unlocked with this button.

If the vehicle is locked using the remote

control, buttons

m and ) in the driver’s

door are inoperable.

Automatic locking 3

The central locking can be set to lock

automatically at a certain speed.

To activate the function, hold button p of

the remote control and button

m in the

driver’s door depressed simultaneously

until a double buzzer sounds.

The doors and luggage compartment are

unlocked by switching off the ignition or by

pressing button

) in the driver’s door.

Individual doors can be unlocked by

pulling on the lock button.

To deactivate the function, hold button p

of the remote control and button

m in the

driver’s door depressed simultaneously

until a buzzer sounds.

The current setting is stored for the remote

control, see page 28.

32 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Note

z If the driver’s door is not closed properly,

the central locking system will unlock

again immediately after locking.

z 30 seconds after unlocking using the

remote control the doors automatically

lock again 3 if neither a door nor the

luggage compartment has been

opened.

z To lock the doors from within (e.g. to

prevent undesired access from outside),

press the central locking switch

z If they are locked, the doors and the

luggage compartment unlock

automatically in the event of an accident

of a certain severity (to permit outside

assistance). Prerequisite: Ignition must

not be switched off.

Closing the windows and sun roof 3 from

outside

In vehicles with electronic windows, the

windows can be closed from outside: hold

down button p on the remote control until

all windows are closed.

The sun roof 3 can be closed from outside:

hold down button p on the remote control

until the roof is fully closed.

Vehicle with electrically retractable exterior

mirrors 3: When closing the windows using

the remote control, the exterior mirrors will

also be retracted. The mirrors will be folded

back out when the vehicle is unlocked using

the remote control.

If the mirrors are retracted using the button

in the driver’s door, they remain in this

position when the doors are unlocked.

9 Warning

Take care when operating the electric

windows and the sun roof 3. Risk of

injury, particularly to children.

Vehicle passengers should be informed

accordingly.

Keep a close watch on the windows and

sun roof 3 when closing them. Ensure

that nothing becomes trapped in them as

they move.

33Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Automatic closing 3

If the mechanical anti-theft locking

system 3 is activated, the electronic

windows and sun roof 3 are automatically

closed and the electrically retractable

exterior mirrors 3 are automatically

retracted as soon as the rain sensor 3

detects water on the windscreen.

To safeguard the battery from discharge

by the rain sensor 3, after four hours the

windows and sun roof 3 are automatically

closed and the electrically retractable

exterior mirrors 3 are automatically

retracted.

For further information on windows and

the sun roof – see pages 42, 45.

Fault

If the central locking system cannot be

operated with the remote control, it may be

due to the following:

z If the central locking system is

overloaded as a result of repeated

operation at short intervals. The power

supply is cut off for a brief period.

z Defective fuse in fuse box – see

page 243.

Seek the assistance of a workshop to rectify

the cause of the fault. To open the driver’s

door with the key, see the following section.

Fault when locking or unlocking

Remote control fault

To unlock

Insert key into lock in driver’s door and turn

forwards as far as it will go. Turn key back

to vertical position and remove from lock.

Unlock driver’s door with central locking

switch, see page 31.

The mechanical anti-theft locking system 3

is deactivated when the key is inserted in

the ignition switch.

To lock

Open front passenger door, close driver’s

door, lock vehicle using central locking

switch, see page 31, close front passenger

door.

Malfunction in central locking system

To unlock

Insert key into driver’s door lock and turn

forwards as far as it will go. Turn key back

to a vertical position and remove. The

other doors can be unlocked by pulling the

interior lock button (unless the mechanical

anti-theft locking system has been

enabled 3). The luggage compartment

and the fuel filler cap remain locked.

To lock

Lock front passenger door and rear doors

by pushing the interior lock button. Lock

driver’s door with key in lock. Turn key

towards rear of vehicle as far as it will go,

turn key to a vertical position and remove.

The unlocked fuel filler cap and the

luggage compartment cannot be locked.

34 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Luggage compartment

To unlock

Press button q on remote control.

To open

The luggage compartment can be opened

by pulling the catch beneath the handle.

Illumination of

s indicates the the

luggage compartment is open.

Pay attention to instructions concerning

open tailgate, see page 35.

To close

There is a handle on the inside of the

tailgate for closing the luggage

compartment.

35Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

To lock

Press button p on the remote control

– or –

central locking switch

m in driver’s door -

press when doors are closed.

Open tailgate

Fitting of accessories on the tailgate will

increase its weight. If it becomes too heavy,

the tailgate will then not stay open.

Vauxhall alarm system 3

Monitors

z the doors, luggage compartment,

bonnet,

z the passenger compartment,

z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised,

z the ignition.

To activate

All doors, windows, the sun roof 3 and the

bonnet must be closed. Within no more

than10 seconds of locking, press button p

on the remote control again.

If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s

door must be opened and closed again so

that the Vauxhall alarm system can be

activated again.

9 Warning

Do not drive with the luggage

compartment open, e.g. when

transporting bulky objects, since toxic

exhaust gas could penetrate the interior.

Also, the number plate cannot be clearly

read unless the luggage compartment is

closed.

9 Warning

Do not use the system if there are people

in the vehicle! The doors cannot be

unlocked from the inside.

36 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Activation without monitoring of

passenger compartment and vehicle tilt

Activate e.g. when animals are left in the

vehicle.

1. Close tailgate and bonnet.

2. Press button Ä, LED in button flashes

(maximum of 10 seconds), see next

column.

3. Close doors.

4. Switch on the Vauxhall alarm system.

LED illuminates. After approx. 10

seconds the system is activated, without

monitoring of the passenger

compartment or vehicle tilt. LED flashes

until system is switched off.

Light emitting diode (LED)

During the first 10 seconds of the Vauxhall

alarm system activation:

After the first 10 seconds of the Vauxhall

alarm system activation:

If a system fault occurs, contact a

workshop for assistance.

z LED comes on

= Test, switch-on delay

z LED flashes

quickly

= Door, luggage

compartment, open

bonnet or system

faults

z LED flashes

slowly

=System switched on

z LED comes

on for approx.

1 second

= Switch-off function

37Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

To deactivate

Press button q of the remote control

– or –

turn on the ignition.

If there is a fault in the remote control,

unlock vehicle as described on page 33.

If the alarm is triggered when the driver’s

door is opened, deactivate the Vauxhall

alarm system by switching on the ignition.

Note

z Changes to the vehicle interior, such as

the use of seat covers, could impair the

function of passenger compartment

monitoring.

z Disable interior monitoring if the interior

of the vehicle switched off is being

heated.

Alarm

An alarm can be triggered whilst the

Vauxhall alarm system is active:

z an acoustic signal (horn) and

z a visual signal (hazard warning lights).

The number of alarms and the duration

thereof are stipulated by law.

The alarm can be silenced by pressing a

button of the remote control or by

switching on the ignition. The Vauxhall

alarm system is deactivated at the same

time.

Child safety locks

Turn rotary knob at rear door lock from the

vertical position using key: door cannot be

opened from inside.

9 Warning

Use the child safety lock whenever

children are occupying the rear seats.

Disregard may lead to injuries or

endanger life. Vehicle passengers should

be informed accordingly.

38 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Universal remote control in mirror

housing 3

to operate up to 3 different remotely

operated systems (e.g. garage door,

domestic alarm system, domestic exterior

lighting).

The programmed universal remote control

can replace the individual remote control

units of the systems to be operated. Three

buttons on the underside of the mirror

housing can be used to operate various

systems.

Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer

for details on compatible systems.

Basic programming of the universal radio

control system

1. Switch on ignition.

2. When programming for the first time,

press both outer buttons under the

mirror housing, until the control indicator

alongside the buttons flashes rapidly.

3. Hold the manual remote control unit at a

distance of 0 to 30 cm from the control

button area of the mirror housing.

4. Press the button on the manual remote

control unit while pressing and holding

the desired button of the universal

remote control.

5. The control indicator in the mirror

housing will flash slowly at first. As soon

as it flashes rapidly, release both

buttons. The universal radio control

system is now programmed for the

chosen system.

6. To program other buttons with other

systems, repeat steps 3 to 5.

If a system cannot be operated after

repeated programming, and the control

indicator flashes rapidly for a short time

after the relevant button has been pressed

and then illuminates for 2 seconds, the

receiver may be equipped with a variable

code system, see next page.

9 Warning

Ensure that no persons, animals or

objects are in the movement zone of the

system to be operated (e.g. a garage

door). Vehicle passengers should be

informed of the hazards.

39Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Programming the universal radio control

system for variable code systems

1. Perform basic programming – see

previous page.

2. Activate synchronisation mode of

system (see system manufacturer’s

system operating manual) and briefly

press the pre-programmed button on

the universal remote control three times

within 30 seconds.

3. The radio control system is now

programmed for variable code systems.

To program other systems for variable

codes, repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other

buttons of the universal remote control

system.

Using the universal radio control system

With the ignition on, press the required

universal radio control button, and the

control indicator in the mirror housing will

illuminate. The pre-programmed system

can now be operated using the universal

radio control system.

Reprogramming individual button

settings

If a button that has already been

programmed is to be used for a different

system, repeat steps 3 to 5 of the basic

programming procedure described

previously.

Clearing down all programmed button

settings

Before selling the vehicle, it is a good idea

to erase button settings.

Button settings can only be erased all at

once. It is not possible to erase individual

button settings. Buttons can, however, be

individually reprogrammed, see

"Reprogramming individual button

settings".

In order to erase the programming of all

3 buttons, press both outer buttons and

release as soon as the LED begins to flash

(after approx. 20 seconds). All button

settings have now been cleared and can be

programmed anew at any time.

Note

Keep replaced manual transmitters for

possible reprogramming. The manual

transmitters can also continue to be used.

If, after repeated attempts at execution of

the above steps, a system cannot be

actuated with the universal remote control,

seek the assistance of a workshop.

During programming, the vehicle should be

within the range of the receiver. Under no

circumstances should the vehicle be in the

movement zone of a system (e.g. garage

door).

Do not program a system without an

automatic safety stop (manufactured

before April 1982).

Take note of the system manufacturer’s

safety instructions for drives and manual

remote control units.

40 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting exterior mirrors 3

Adjustment using the four-way switch in

the driver’s door: If the outer mirror

switch 1 is pressed, the four-way switch

operates the driver and passenger

mirrors 3, if the inner mirror switch 2 is

pressed, it only operates the passenger

mirror.

The glass of the mirror is adjusted in the

relevant direction in accordance with the

operation of the four-way switch.

Electrical seat adjustment with Memory

function 3:

If the inner mirror switch 2 is pressed, the

passenger-side exterior mirror is pointed

automatically at the rear tyres after

reverse gear is engaged in order to assist

parking (not if towing a trailer) 3.

Swinging in exterior mirror

Manual: The exterior mirrors can be folded

in by gently pressing the outer edge of the

housing.

Electric 3 (both mirror switches must not be

latched into position):

Push four-way switch to the right: outside

rear view mirrors swivel in.

Push four-way to the left: outside rear view

mirrors swivel out.

Return the mirrors to the driving position

before starting off.

The mirrors can be retracted from the

outside: Press button p on the remote

control approx. 1 second. The mirrors will

be extended the next time the vehicle is

unlocked.

Swivelling only allowed at speeds of up to

4 mph (7 km/h).

For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior

mirrors will swing out of their normal

mounting position if they are bumped with

sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by

applying slight pressure to the mirror

housing.

Aspherical exterior mirror 3

The aspherical mirror glass makes the blind

angle smaller. The curvature makes objects

look smaller, making it more difficult to

estimate how far away following vehicles

are.

41Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirrors 3

on the driver’s side

Dazzle from following vehicles at night is

automatically reduced.

The mirror does not reduce dazzle when:

z the ignition is switched off,

z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever

set to R,

z the interior lights are on,

z a door is open.

Interior mirror

To adjust, swivel mirror housing.

Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing

to reduce dazzle from following vehicles at

night.

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror 3

Dazzle from following vehicles at night is

automatically reduced.

The sensor is located at the bottom of

the housing. In the case of vehicles with

a position memory for electrically operated

front seats 3 or a universal remote

control 3, the sensor is located at the top

right of the mirror glass.

The mirror does not reduce dazzle when:

z the ignition is switched off,

z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever

set to R,

z the interior lights are on,

z a door is open.

42 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Electric windows

The electric windows can be used

z with ignition on,

z within 10 minutes of switching ignition

off,

z within 10 minutes of opening or closing

the driver’s door,

z within 10 minutes of inserting or

removing the ignition key.

Readiness for operation stops when the

vehicle is locked.

Operation via 2 rocker buttons in the

driver’s door. Additional rocker buttons in

the front passenger door and the rear

doors 3.

To operate window in stages, tap switch.

For automatic opening or closing, keep

switch pressed for slightly longer; to stop

window movement, tap switch again.

Vehicles with rear 3 electric windows have

a slide switch between the buttons in the

driver’s door

z up: the front windows can be operated

using the buttons,

z down: the rear windows can be operated

using the buttons.

9 Warning

Take care when operating the electronic

windows. Risk of injury, especially for

children. Vehicle occupants should be

informed accordingly.

If there are children on the rear seat,

switch on the child safety system 3 for

the electric windows.

Keep a close watch on the windows when

closing them. Ensure that nothing

becomes trapped in them as they move.

43Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Safety function

If the window glass encounters resistance

above the middle of the window during

automatic closing, it is immediately

stopped and the window opened again.

If the windows do not move easily (e.g. on

account of frost), keep pressing the switch

for the window in question until the window

has been closed in stages.

Child safety system for rear windows 3

Switch

z in the driver’s door

z press (switch

z illuminates in red): rear

windows cannot be operated using the

buttons in the rear doors,

z press again (switch

z no longer

illuminates in red): rear windows can be

operated using the buttons in the rear

doors.

Closing windows from outside

The windows can be closed from

outside using the remote control: Depress

the p button until the windows are closed.

44 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Automatic closing 3

see page 33.

Overload

If the windows are repeatedly operated at

short intervals, the power supply is briefly

cut off.

The system is protected by fuses in the fuse

box – see page 243.

Fault

If the windows cannot be opened and

closed automatically, activate the window

electronics as follows:

1. Close doors.

2. Switch on ignition.

3. Window completely open.

4. Close window and press on button for at

least 3 seconds.

5. Repeat for each window.

Windows in rear doors

Turn hand crank 3 towards the front or

rear.

45Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Sun roof 3

The electric sun roof can be operated

z with ignition on,

z within 10 minutes of switching ignition

off,

z within 10 minutes of opening or closing

the driver’s door,

z within 10 minutes of inserting or

removing the ignition key.

Readiness for operation stops when the

vehicle is locked.

Operated using rotary switch in the

overhead control panel.

To open

Turn the rotary switch to any position

between

d and ü. The sun roof will

automatically move to the desired position.

When the switch is in position ü, the sun

roof is fully opened.

Comfort position

Set rotary switch to position

f. With the

roof in this position, wind noise is reduced.

To close

Turn rotary switch to

To raise

Turn the rotary switch to any position

between

d and e. The sun roof will

automatically move to the desired position.

When the switch is in position

e, the sun

roof is fully raised.

To lower

Turn rotary switch to

Position memory

After the ignition has been switched on, the

sun roof can be automatically returned to

its last position by briefly pressing the

rotary switch.

9 Warning

Caution when operating the sun roof.

Risk of injury, particularly to children.

Vehicle passengers should be informed

accordingly.

Keep a close watch on the sliding roof

when closing it. Ensure that nothing

becomes trapped as it moves.

46 Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Safety function

If the sun roof encounters resistance during

automatic closing, it is immediately

stopped and opened again, as long as the

vehicle is stationary.

If the sun roof movement is stiff, e.g. due to

frost, turn rotary switch to

d and keep it

pressed until the sun roof is closed.

Closing sun roof from outside

To close the sun roof from outside with the

remote control: Press button p until the

sun roof is closed.

If the windows are to be closed from

outside the vehicle, but the sun roof is to be

left open, briefly press the rotary switch

before switching off the ignition.

Automatic closing 3

see page 33.

Sun shade

To reduce the sunlight in the interior with

the sliding roof closed or raised.

Open or close sun shade as required.

When the sun roof is opened, the sun shade

is also opened.

9 Warning

If when the vehicle is being driven the sun

roof encounters resistance during

automatic closing, because of the higher

closing forces involved the protective

function cannot be guaranteed, and

there is a risk of injury.

47Keys, doors, windows, sun roof

Overload

If the system is overloaded, the power

supply is automatically cut off for a short

time.

Fault

If the sun roof no longer assumes the

desired position automatically, program

sun roof electronics as follows:

1. Switch on ignition.

2. Press the rotary switch until the sun roof

is shut, then keep it pressed for at least a

further 3 seconds.

3. Turn rotary switch to ü and keep it

depressed until the sun roof is open.

4. Turn rotary switch to

d and keep it

depressed until the sun roof is closed.

5. Turn rotary switch to

e and leave there

until the sun roof is fully raised.

6. Turn rotary switch to

d and keep it

depressed until the sun roof is closed.

Roller blinds at rear door

windows 3

To reduce sunlight at the rear seats.

Pull the blind upwards using the grip and

engage it at the top in the door frame.

48 Seats, interior

Seats, interior

Manually adjustable front seats

Adjust seat longitudinally

To adjust seat position, pull handle at front

of seat, move seat and then release

handle.

Adjusting the backrest

To adjust, turn side handwheel on the seat

while releasing the load on the backrest.

Move backrest to suit seating position.

Manually adjustable front seats ........ 48

Electrically adjustable front seats 3 .. 50

Head restraints .................................... 53

Armrest 3 between the front seats.... 55

Armrest between rear seats ............... 56

Rear seats............................................. 56

Travel Assistant 3 ............................... 58

Luggage compartment extension ..... 65

Luggage compartment cover ............ 67

Safety net 3 ......................................... 68

Lashing eyes ........................................ 69

Notes on loading the vehicle.............. 70

Three-stage safety system.................. 71

Three-point seat belts ......................... 71

Belt tensioners...................................... 72

Operating the seat belts..................... 75

Child restraint system 3 ...................... 77

Airbag System...................................... 80

Cigarette lighter 3............................... 94

Accessory socket 3.............................. 94

Ashtray ................................................. 95

Stowage compartments...................... 96

Drink holders........................................ 97

Sun visors.............................................. 97

9 Warning

Never adjust seats during driving, as they

can move uncontrollably.

49Seats, interior

Adjusting the seat height 3

To adjust height of seat, operate lever on

outboard rear side of seat.

Pump action of lever

To adjust seat incline 3

Pump action of lever

Adjusting the lumbar support 3

To adjust, activate the lever on the

backrest, relieving pressure on the backrest

as you do so.

Adjust lumbar support to suit personal

requirements.

Upwards: Seat higher

Downwards: Seat lower

Upwards: Seat steeper

Downwards: Seat flatter

50 Seats, interior

To adjust thigh support 3 on the sports

seats 3

To adjust, press button in recessed grip

located in the centre beneath the adjusting

cushion and move the thigh support.

Adjust thigh support to suit personal

requirements.

Seat position

Adjust driver’s seat such that with the

driver sitting upright the steering wheel is

held in the area of its upper spokes with the

driver’s arms slightly bent.

Push passenger seat as far back as

possible.

The seat backrests must not be tilted too

far back (recommended tilting angle

approx. 25°).

Electrically adjustable front

seats 3

Adjustment

The seat position can be adjusted by

means of switches on the outboard side of

the seats.

Adjusting the inclination

Move switch 1 upwards/downwards at

front.

9 Warning

Failure to observe the descriptions could

lead to injuries which could be fatal.

Vehicle passengers should be informed

accordingly before starting off.

9 Warning

Care must be taken when operating the

electrically adjustable seats. There is a

risk of injury, particularly for children, and

a danger that articles could become

trapped.

Keep a close watch on the seats when

adjusting them.

Vehicle passengers should be informed

accordingly.

51Seats, interior

Adjusting the longitudinal position

Move switch 1 forwards/backwards.

Height adjustment

Move switch 1 upwards/downwards at rear

Seat backrest adjustment

Turn switch 2 forwards/backwards.

Operate switch until desired seat position is

reached. Seat position – see page 51.

After adjusting the seat, adjust height of

seat belt – see page 75.

Electrically operated lumbar support 3 on

driver’s seat

Adjust lumbar support using four-way

switch on outboard side of driver’s seat.

Adjust lumbar support to suit personal

requirements.

Moving support up and down: push button

up or down.

Increasing and decreasing support: push

button forward or backward.

Thigh support 3 on driver’s seat

see page 50.

Seat position

Adjust driver’s seat such that with the

driver sitting upright the steering wheel is

held in the area of its upper spokes with the

driver’s arms slightly bent.

Push passenger seat as far back as

possible.

The seat backrests must not be tilted too

far back (recommended tilting angle

approx. 25°).

9 Warning

Failure to observe the descriptions could

lead to injuries which could be fatal.

Vehicle passengers should be informed

accordingly before starting off.

52 Seats, interior

Memory function 3 for electrically

adjustable driver’s seat and exterior

mirrors

Three different seat and mirror settings can

be stored (e.g. for three drivers).

Readiness for operation

z with ignition on,

z within 10 minutes of switching ignition

off,

z within 10 minutes of opening or closing

the driver’s door,

z within 10 minutes of inserting or

removing the ignition key.

Readiness for operation stops when the

vehicle is locked.

Storing settings

1. adjust seat,

2. to adjust exterior mirror, see pages 6, 40,

3. press memory button M and the position

button to be used (1, 2 or 3)

simultaneously, and storage is

acknowledged by an acoustic signal.

53Seats, interior

Retrieving settings

Keep position keys 1, 2 or 3 pressed until

the stored seat and mirror positions have

been reached.

For reasons of safety, seat adjustment

stops immediately if the position button is

released or one of the setting buttons is

operated.

Adjustments may only be performed with

vehicle stationary.

Store and activate the settings using the

remote controls 3

When the vehicle is locked using the remote

control the current driver’s seat and

exterior mirror positions are stored, see

page 28.

The seat adjusting procedure can be

stopped immediately by operating a

setting button.

Passenger side mirror with mirror parking

assistance 3

see page 40.

Overload

If the seat setting is electrically overloaded,

the power supply is automatically cut off

for a short time.

The system is protected by fuses in the fuse

box – see page 243.

Head restraints

Adjusting the front head restraints and

the rear outboard head restraints 3

To adjust, press button on side and adjust

height.

In order to increase the size of the luggage

compartment or if they are not being used,

push rear head restraints down as far as

possible, see page 65.

When the seats are occupied, adjust the

height according to the body size of the

occupant.

54 Seats, interior

To adjust the incline, swivel the bottom

edge of the head restraint forward or

rearward

Adjusting the rear, centre head

restraint 3

To adjust head restraints, pull forwards

with both hands and slide up or down.

To improve visibility if the middle seat is

unoccupied or to increase the size of the

luggage compartment, push headrest

down as far as possible.

If seat is occupied, pull head restraint

upwards.

Head restraint position

The middle of the head restraint should be

at eye level. If this is not possible for

extremely tall persons, set to highest

position, and set to lowest position for

small persons.

9 Warning

Disregarding the instructions can lead to

injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle

passengers should be informed

accordingly before setting off.

55Seats, interior

Active head restraints 3

In the event of a rear-end impact, the

active head restraints tilt slightly forwards.

The head is more effectively supported by

the head restraint and the danger of

whiplash in the area of the neck.

Active head restraints are identified by the

lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint

guide sleeves.

Removing the head restraints

Press and release the two catches. Pull and

remove the head restraint.

In order to increase the size of the luggage

compartment or if they are not being used,

push rear head restraints down as far as

possible, see page 65.

Note

Only approved objects or components

should be attached to the head restraint of

the unoccupied front passenger seat.

Armrest 3 between the front seats

The armrest can be pushed forward. If the

armrest is not required, push it back and

fold it up.

56 Seats, interior

The armrest contains a stowage

compartment: to open, slide armrest back,

press button at front and lift.

Armrest between rear seats

The armrest can be folded down.

If the rear centre seat is being used or the

rear seats are being folded down, fold

armrest upward.

Rear seats

Move seat

Pull handle beneath seat and slide seat

forward or backward. Release handle and

allow seat to audibly latch.

57Seats, interior

Adjusting backrest

Pull handle at outboard side of seat and

move backrest forward or backward.

Release handle and allow seat to audibly

latch.

Centre rear seat The underside of the centre seat cushion

houses a console with stowage

compartments and drink holders.

Fold up the centre seat cushion to access

the console. This is done by pulling the

handle beneath the seat, lifting the seat

and swivelling it 180° rearwards until the

seat cushion faces down.

9 Warning

The centre rear seat may only be

occupied by persons between

1.50 metres and 1.75 metres tall.

When this seat is in use, both outboard

seats must be slid all the way back with

their backrests flush with the centre seat

backrest.

Child restraint systems are not to be

mounted on the centre rear seat.

58 Seats, interior

Travel Assistant 3

The Travel Assistant Contains

z Armrest

z Stowage compartments

z Waste container

z Drink holders

z Accessory sockets.

z Connection console

e.g. for DVD player 3

z Electric cool box

z Tables

z Twin Audio (rear audio module) 3 or

stowage compartment.

The Travel Assistant and the connecting

console are installed above the folded-over

centre seat cushion.

Installing the Travel Assistant

The centre seat cushion must face down.

This is done by pulling the handle beneath

the seat, lifting the seat and swivelling

it 180° rearwards – see page 65.

Swivel the locking lever on the console

upwards.

Insert both hooks of connecting console

into recesses beneath centre rear seat

backrest.

Swivel open and hold cover of front

attachment points in floor in front of

console.

Swivel connecting console downward and

engage in attachment points.

59Seats, interior

Swivel the locking lever downwards.

Check the locking position of the Travel

Assistant: The red mark (see Fig. 17566 J)

must not be visible. Otherwise, lock using

the key – see page 63, Fig. 17575 J.

Remove cap 3 from plug at securing

bracket.

To lock, insert Travel Assistant into recesses

in connecting console and slide back as far

as possible.

If it is correctly locked, the red mark must

no longer be visible in the window,

otherwise the procedure must be repeated.

9 Warning

If it is not correctly locked, the Travel

Assistant could be propelled forward with

considerable force when hard braking

occurs, risk of injury.

60 Seats, interior

Drink holder and accessory sockets

Open the drink holder by pressing the

marking.

Only accessories with maximum power

consumption of 120 Watts must be

connected to the accessory sockets.

For notes – see page 94.

Stowage compartments

The lower stowage compartment is opened

by pressing the mark. The underside of the

compartment has an opening through

which objects in the compartment can be

raised.

The upper stowage compartment is

located under the armrest. To open, press

the button and fold the armrest upwards.

Connecting console for DVD player 3

When not in use, pull connecting console

upward, press button and slide downward.

61Seats, interior

Swivel up the display holder, slide DVD

player display into bracket from below and

fix in position with bracket.

Maximum load: 1 kg.

Electric cool box

To open, fold open the armrest together

with the stowage compartment.

Switch on the cool box as needed.

62 Seats, interior

Tables

Fold armrest upward (1).

Use recessed grip to pull table upwards as

far as it will go (1), swivel table forward (2)

and fold downwards (3).

Set required clearance by adjusting

longitudinal position of table (4).

Swivel armrest down.

63Seats, interior

To fold away the table, swivel the armrest

up.

Push the table forward as far as it will

go (1).

Fold the table upwards passed the

resistance point (2), swivel it rearwards and

insert in the Travel Assistant (3).

Swivel armrest down.

Dismantling the Travel Assistant

Open catch using key, red mark appears in

window.

64 Seats, interior

Pull the Travel Assistant to the front on the

connecting console and remove.

Fit cap 3 to plug on securing bracket.

Press the locking lever down, press the

button on the front of the connecting

console and swivel the locking lever

upwards.

Swivel connecting console upward and pull

out of recesses.

65Seats, interior

Luggage compartment extension

The maximum amount of luggage space is

obtained by folding down the centre seat

and the two outboard seats and the

passenger seat backrest 3 and removing

the luggage compartment cover, see

following description.

Fold down middle rear seat cushion

Remove luggage compartment cover if

necessary – see page 67.

Remove Travel Assistant 3 – see page 63.

Pull the handle beneath the seat, lift the

seat and swivel it 180° rearwards until the

seat cushion faces down.

To fold out the seat cushion, pull handle

beneath seat, lift at rear handle and tilt

forwards by 180°.

9 Warning

The load must not obstruct operation of

the pedals, handbrake and gearshift, or

the freedom of movement of the driver.

Do not leave unsecured objects in the

interior. Note instruction on page 70.

66 Seats, interior

Fold down centre backrest

Fold middle rear seat cushion, see left

column.

Slide down middle head restraint

– see page 54.

Pull the strap located on the back of the

centre seat backrest and fold the backrest.

The outer seats can continue to be used.

To move upright, pull loop and audibly

engage backrest.

Fold down outboard rear seat backrests.

Remove luggage compartment cover if

necessary – see page 67.

Push rear head restraint down as far as

possible – see page 54.

Slide rear seat back.

If fitted, remove the push-on sleeves 3

for attaching the ISOFIX child restraint

system 3; see accompanying instructions

for the ISOFIX child restraint system.

Pull handle on outboard side of seat and

fold rear seat backrest onto seat cushion.

Push down rear seat backrest until it

audibly latches.

If so desired, fold down the second rear

seat backrest and the centre rear seat.

67Seats, interior

To move the rear seat backrest upright,

pull handle on outboard side, move rear

seat backrest upright and audibly latch.

Folding down the front passenger seat 3

Push head restraint on front passenger’s

seat down as far as it will go.

Slide front passenger seat backwards.

Fold front passenger seat forward by

raising release lever.

To restore, press the release lever forward,

restore the front seat backrest to an

upright position and audibly engage.

Notes on loading

see page 70.

Luggage compartment cover

To close

Pull luggage compartment cover towards

rear of vehicle using handle and hook into

side retainers.

Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged

objects on the cover.

To open

Remove luggage compartment cover from

side brackets. It rolls up automatically.

68 Seats, interior

Removing

Open luggage compartment cover.

Raise the release lever on the right of the

luggage compartment cover. Remove

cover from the brackets by lifting first on

the right, then on the left.

Fitting

Fit the luggage compartment cover in the

bracket on the left-hand side, fold up the

release lever on the right-hand side, fit the

luggage compartment cover in the bracket

on the right-hand side, engage and press

the release lever closed.

Safety net 3

The safety net is installed behind the front

seats.

Passengers must not be carried behind the

safety net.

Fitting

Open the zipper and unroll the safety net.

Press the safety knobs onto the joints and

unfold both net rods until they engage –

see next page, Fig. 17818 J.

There are two brackets in the roof frame 3.

Hook the net rods into the brackets on one

side and then the other. Slide forward to

engage.

69Seats, interior

Hook belts into lashing eyes 3 in floor

behind front seats and tension.

Removing

Unhook belts from lashing eyes in floor.

Unhook rods from brackets in roof frame.

Press retaining knobs on joints and

collapse rods. Roll up net and stow in

attached bag.

Lashing eyes

In the luggage compartment, secure items

being transported against slipping by

attaching lashing straps 3 or a luggage

net 3.

70 Seats, interior

Notes on loading the vehicle

z Heavy objects in the luggage

compartment should be placed against

the engaged rear seat backrests or, if the

rear seat backrests are folded down,

against the front seat backrests. If

objects are to be stacked, the heavier

objects should be placed at the bottom.

Unsecured objects in the luggage

compartment would be thrown forward

with great force in the event of heavy

braking, for example.

z Secure objects with lashing straps 3

attached to lashing eyes – see page 69.

If heavy loads slip when the vehicle is

braked heavily or driven around a bend,

the handling of the vehicle may change.

z Fit safety net 3 when transporting

articles in luggage compartment – see

page 68.

z Loose objects in the luggage

compartment should be secured against

slipping using a luggage net 3 – see

page 69.

z If the backrests are not folded down

when transporting objects in the

luggage compartment, they must be

engaged in their upright position – see

page 65.

z Close luggage compartment cover – see

page 67.

z Do not allow the load to protrude above

the upper edge of the rear seat

backrests, or above the upper edge of

the front seat backrests if the rear seat

backrests are folded down.

z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit 3

must always be freely accessible.

z Do not place any objects in front of the

rear window or on the instrument panel.

They are reflected in the glass, obstruct

the driver’s view and will be thrown

through the vehicle, for instance in the

event of heavy braking.

z Objects must not be stored in the airbag

inflation area, because they could cause

injury if the airbag inflates.

z The load must not obstruct the operation

of the pedals, the handbrake or the

gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of

movement. Do not place loose objects in

the interior.

z Do not drive with luggage compartment

open when transporting bulky objects,

for example, since toxic exhaust fumes

could penetrate the interior.

z Weights, payload and roof load – see

page 285.

z Driving with a roof load, see

pages 184, 187, 218, increases the

sensitivity of the vehicle to cross-winds

and has a detrimental effect on vehicle

handling owing to the vehicle’s higher

centre of gravity.

9 Warning

Failure to observe these descriptions can

lead to injuries which may be fatal.

Vehicle passengers should be informed

accordingly.

71Seats, interior

Three-stage safety system

Comprising:

z three-point seat belts,

z belt tensioners at the front seats and the

rear outer seats,

z airbag systems for driver, front

passenger and outboard rear seats 3.

The three stages are activated in sequence

depending on the severity of the accident:

z The automatic seat belt locking devices

prevent the belt strap from being pulled

out and thus ensure that the vehicle

occupants are retained in their seats.

z The front seat belts are pulled down at

the belt buckles. This means the belts fit

snugly, the occupants are decelerated

early with the vehicle and the body

loading is reduced.

z The airbag systems are also triggered in

the event of serious accidents and form a

safety cushion for the occupants.

Depending on the severity of the

accident, the front airbags inflate in two

stages.

Please read the instructions provided with

the child restraint system!

Three-point seat belts

The vehicle is equipped with three-point

seat belts with automatic retractors and

locking devices, allowing full freedom of

body movement although the spring

tensioned belts always ensure a snug fit.

For information on correct seating

position – see pages 50, 75, 81.

The seat belts lock during heavy

acceleration or deceleration.

9 Warning

The airbag systems serve to supplement

the three-point seat belts and belt

tensioners. The seat belts must therefore

always be worn. Disregard of these

instructions may lead to injuries or

endanger life. Vehicle passengers should

be informed accordingly.

72 Seats, interior

In the event of an accident, persons not

wearing seat belts endanger their fellow

occupants and themselves.

Control indicator X for the seat belt – see

page 101.

Seat belts are only intended for one person.

They are not suitable for anyone under

12 years of age or under 150 cm tall.

For children up to 12 years of age, we

recommend the Vauxhall child restraint

system – see page 77.

Belt force limiters

on the front seat belts reduce stresses on

the body by releasing the seat belt gently

during an impact. This allows the body to

move slightly in anticipation of the impact.

Testing the seat belts

Check all parts of the belt system from time

to time for damage and to ensure function.

Replace damaged parts. Following an

accident, have the seat belts and actuated

belt tensioners replaced by a workshop.

Do not make alterations to the seat belts,

their anchorages, their automatic

retractors and the belt buckles.

Do not damage the seat belt with sharp

objects, and do not get it trapped.

Belt tensioners

The front seat belt systems are fitted with

belt tensioners. The seat belts are pulled

down and tensioned at the belt buckles in

the event of frontal and rear collisions,

depending on the severity of the accident.

This tensions the seat belts.

9 Warning

Always wear your seat belt, and that

means also in urban traffic and when you

are a rear seat passenger. It can save

your life!

Pregnant women must always wear a

seat belt – see page 75.

73Seats, interior

Actuation of belt tensioners

is indicated by illumination of control

indicator v, see next page.

If the belt tensioners are triggered, they

must be replaced by a workshop.

Important information – see page 72.

Control indicator v for belt tensioners

The operation of the belt tensioners is

electronically monitored together with the

airbag systems and indicated on the

instrument panel by the control

indicator v. When the ignition is switched

on, the control indicator illuminates for

approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate,

does not go off after 4 seconds or

illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in

the belt tensioner system or the airbag

systems, see page 86. The belt tensioner or

the airbag systems may not activate if an

accident occurs.

Deployment of the belt tensioners is

indicated by continuous illumination of v.

The system’s integrated self-diagnostics

allows faults to be quickly remedied.

If control indicator v in the instrument

panel fails, for reasons of safety, the

text AIrbAG appears in the odometer

display. Pressing the reset button will cause

the text to disappear. It then reappears in

the odometer display 10 seconds later.

9 Warning

Have the cause of the fault eliminated

immediately by a workshop.

74 Seats, interior

Important

z Do not fit accessories not specifically

released for your vehicle type or store

objects in the belt tensioner operating

area (in the area of the belt buckles) due

to the risk of injury in the event the belt

tensioners are triggered.

z Do not make any modifications to the

components of the belt tensioners, as

this will render the vehicle unroadworthy.

z The belt tensioner and airbag system

control electronics can be found in the

centre console area. In order to avoid

malfunctions, do not store magnetic

objects in this area.

z When using the rear seats, make sure

that the components of the front seat

belts are not damaged by shoes or other

objects. Do not allow dirt to enter the

automatic seat belt retractor.

z We recommend that you have the front

seats removed by a workshop.

z The belt tensioners trigger once only,

indicated by the lighting of the control

indicator v. Have a workshop replace

triggered belt tensioners.

z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety

instructions given for this must be

observed. Take the vehicle to a recycling

company for disposal.

9 Warning

Incorrect handling (e.g. removal or fitting

of seat belts or belt buckles) can trigger

the belt tensioners with risk of injury.

75Seats, interior

Operating the seat belts

Fitting seat belts

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and

place it across the body, making sure it is

not twisted.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle. The

front seat backrest must not be tilted back

too far or the seat belt will not operate

properly. The recommended angle of

inclination is 25°. Make sure that the lap

belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly

across the body. Tension the belt

frequently while driving by tugging the

diagonal part of the belt.

Bulky clothing will impede the snug fit of

the seat belt. The seat belt must not be

placed over hard or breakable objects in

the pockets of your clothing (e.g. pens,

keys, spectacles) as this may cause injury.

Do not place any objects, such as

handbags or mobile telephones, between

the seat belt and your body.

Height adjustment

Height adjustment of upper anchorage

point for front seat belts:

1. Pull out the seat belt slightly.

2. Front seat belts: Push the button down or

push the belt guide up.

Rear seat belts: Press the belt guide and

push up or down.

3. Set desired height.

4. Allow belt guide to audibly engage.

Do not adjust height while driving.

9 Warning

On pregnant women in particular, the lap

belt must be positioned as low as

possible across the pelvis so as not to put

too much pressure on the abdomen.

76 Seats, interior

Adjust height such that the belt passes

over the wearer’s shoulder and rests

against the shoulder. It must not pass over

the neck or upper arm.

Removing the belt

To release belt, press red button on belt

buckle; the seat belt retracts by itself.

Three-point seat belt on centre rear seat

Slide open cover in roof and remove seat

belt latch plates from roof.

77Seats, interior

Engage lower latch plate into left-hand

buckle (1) of the centre seat. Guide the seat

belt by the upper latch plate over the

shoulder and abdomen (avoid twisting)

and engage in right-hand buckle (2) of the

centre seat.

If the centre seat is being used, both outer

seats must be slid back with their backrests

flush with the centre seat backrest.

To release belt, press button on belt

buckle (2). If the centre seat is folded, press

button on belt buckle (1). The seat belt

retracts by itself. Engage upper latch plate

in bracket and attach lower latch plate to

magnetic bracket on roof. Push cover shut.

Child restraint system 3

When using a child restraint system, follow

the instructions for installation and use.

The country in which you are travelling

may not permit the use of child restraint

systems on certain seats. Always comply

with the local or national regulations.

Selecting the right system

Your child should travel facing backwards

in the car for as long as possible. A child

has a very weak cervical spinal column and

in the event of an accident is less likely to

suffer injury in a rearward-facing, semi-

lying position than if seated upright.

9 Warning

Never carry child restraint systems on

your lap, risk of fatal injury.

78 Seats, interior

Permissible options for fitting a child safety seat

For reasons of safety, we recommend that child safety seats be fitted to one of the outboard

rear seats.

Weight and

age class

We recommend the use of each system until the child reaches the upper weight limit.

On front passenger

seat

On outboard rear seats On centre rear seat

Group 0:

up to 10 kg

or approx.

10 months

Group 0+:

up to 13 kg

or approx.

2 years

, + U, + X

Group I:

9 to 18 kg

or approx.

8months to

4years

, + U, + X

Group II:

15 to 25 kg

or approx.

3 to 7 years

Group III:

22 to 36 kg

or approx.

6to 12 years

XU X

= Limited, only with seat occupancy

recognition and Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders.

If the child restraint system is being

secured using a three-point seat

belt, move seat height adjustment 3

to uppermost position. Move front

passenger seat as far back as

possible and move front passenger

seat belt anchorage point to lowest

position.

= Limited, only with seat occupancy

recognition and Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders.

If the child restraint system is being

secured using a three-point seat

belt, move seat height adjustment 3

to uppermost position. Move front

passenger seat as far back as

possible so that vehicle safety belt

runs from anchorage point towards

the front.

79Seats, interior

Note

z Children under 12 years or under 150 cm

tall should only travel in an appropriate

child safety system.

z When transporting children, use the child

restraint systems suitable for the child’s

weight.

z Ensure that the child restraint system has

been correctly fitted, see instructions

provided with child restraint system.

z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint

system can be wiped clean.

z Do not stick anything on the child

restraint systems and do not cover them

with any other materials.

z Only allow the child to enter and exit on

the side of the vehicle facing away from

the road.

z A child restraint system which has been

subjected to stress in an accident must

be replaced.

z Secure or remove child restraint systems

carried in the vehicle when not in use.

Mounting brackets 3 for ISOFIX child

restraint systems

The brackets located between the backrest

and seat cushion are used for mounting

ISOFIX child restraint systems.

Please follow the instructions

accompanying the ISOFIX child restraint

system.

Only ISOFIX child restraint systems

approved for the vehicle may be used.

U = Can be used universally in

combination with a three-point seat

belt.

+ = Vehicle seat available with ISOFIX

fixings. When using ISOFIX, only

ISOFIX child restraint systems

approved for the vehicle may be

used.

X = No child restraint system permitted

in this weight class.

80 Seats, interior

Airbag System

The airbag system consists of several

separate systems.

Front airbag system

The front airbag system will be triggered in

the event of a serious accident involving a

frontal impact and forms safety cushions

for the driver and front passenger. The

forward movement of the driver and front

passenger is checked and the risk of

injuries to the upper body and head

thereby substantially reduced.

Side airbag system 3

The side airbag is triggered in the event of

a side-on collision to form a safety cushion

for the driver or front passenger in the

respective door area. This substantially

reduces the risk of injury to the upper body

and pelvis.

Curtain airbag system 3

The curtain airbag system triggers in case

of a side-on collision and provides a safety

barrier in the head area on the respective

side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of

injury to the head considerably in case of a

side-on collision.

81Seats, interior

Airbag system

Front airbag

The front airbag system is identified by the

word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and

above the glove compartment.

The front airbag system comprises:

z an airbag with inflator in the steering

wheel and a second one in the

instrument panel,

z control electronics with impact sensors,

z control indicator for airbag systems v in

instrument panel,

z seat occupancy recognition 3,

z the control indicator for Vauxhall child

restraint systems

y with transponders 3

in the instrument panel.

The front airbag system will be triggered:

z depending on the severity of the

accident,

z depending on the type of impact,

z within the range shown in the illustration,

z independent of side airbag and curtain

airbag system 3.

Exception:

Passenger seat with seat occupancy

recognition system 3. The seat occupancy

recognition system deactivates the front

and side airbags 3 on the front passenger

side if the front passenger seat is

unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint

system with transponders 3 has been fitted

to the front passenger seat. Seat

occupancy recognition, see page 87.

Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3, see page 77.

Examples of events triggering the front

airbag system:

z Impact against a non-yielding obstacle:

the front airbags are triggered at low

vehicle speed.

z Impact against a yielding obstacle:

(such as another vehicle): the front

airbags are only triggered at a higher

vehicle speed.

82 Seats, interior

When triggered, the front airbags inflate in

milliseconds to form a safety cushion for

the driver and front passenger. The

forward movement of the front seat

occupants is checked, thereby

substantially reducing the risk of injury to

the upper body and head.

No impairment of view will occur, because

the airbags inflate and deflate so quickly

that it is often not even noticed in an

accident.

The front airbag system will not be

triggered in the event of

z the ignition is switched off

z minor frontal collisions

z accidents in which the vehicle overturns

z collisions involving a side or rear impact

that is to say, if it would not be of benefit to

the occupants.

9 Warning

The front airbag system provides

optimum protection when the seat,

backrest and head restraint are correctly

adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat

according to the occupant’s height such

that with the driver sitting upright the

steering wheel is held in the area of its

upper spokes with the driver’s arms

slightly bent. The front passenger’s seat

should be as far back as possible, with

the backrest upright – see pages 3, 48.

Do not place the head, body, hands or

feet on the covers of the airbag systems.

Do not place any objects in the area in

which the airbags inflate. Important

information – see page 89.

9 Warning

The three-point seat belt must be

correctly fitted – see page 71.

83Seats, interior

In addition, the front airbag system will not

be triggered for the front passenger in

versions with seat occupancy recognition 3

z the front passenger seat is unoccupied,

z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders 3.

Seat occupancy recognition – see

page 87. Vauxhall child restraint system

with transponders 3 – see page 77.

Side airbag 3

The side airbag system is identified by the

word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the

front seat backrests.

The side airbag system comprises:

z an airbag with inflator in the back of the

driver’s and front passenger seat

respectively,

z the control electronics,

z the side impact sensors,

z control light for airbag systems v in

instrument panel,

z seat occupancy recognition 3,

z the control indicator for Vauxhall child

restraint systems

y with transponders 3

in the instrument panel.

The side airbag system will be triggered:

z depending on the severity of the

accident,

z depending on the type of impact,

z within the range shown in the illustration

on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or

front passenger side,

z independently of the front airbag

system.

Exception:

Passenger seat with seat occupancy

recognition system 3. The seat occupancy

recognition system deactivates the front

and side airbags 3 on the front passenger

side if the front passenger seat is

unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint

system with transponders 3 has been fitted

to the front passenger seat. Seat

occupancy recognition – see page 87.

Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3 – see page 77.

9 Warning

Seat belts must therefore always be worn.

The front airbag system serves to

supplement the three-point seat belts. If

you do not wear your seat belt you risk

being seriously injured, or even thrown

from the vehicle, in the event of an

accident.

In the event of an accident the seat belt

helps to keep you in the correct seating

position, so that the front airbag system

can provide you with effective protection.

84 Seats, interior

When triggered, the side airbag inflates

within milliseconds to form a safety cushion

for the driver or front passenger in the

respective door area. This substantially

reduces the risk of injury to the upper body

and pelvis in the event of a side-on

collision.

The side airbags will not be triggered in the

event of

z the ignition is switched off

z frontal collisions

z accidents in which the vehicle overturns

z collisions involving a rear impact

z collisions involving a side impact outside

the passenger cell.

In addition, the side airbag system will not

be triggered for the front passenger in

versions with seat occupancy recognition 3

z the front passenger seat is unoccupied

z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders 3.

Seat occupancy recognition – see

page 87. Vauxhall child restraint system

with transponders 3 – see page 77.

9 Warning

There must be no objects in the area in

which the airbag inflates or in the area

between the seat backrests and the

vehicle body. Do not place the hands or

arms on the covers of the airbag systems.

Important information – see page 89.

The three-point seat belt must always be

correctly fitted – see page 71.

85Seats, interior

Curtain airbag 3

The curtain airbag system is identified by

the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim.

The curtain airbag system comprises:

z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame

on the driver’s and front passenger side

respectively,

z the control electronics,

z the side impact sensors,

z the control indicator for airbag

systems v in the instrument.

The curtain airbag system will be triggered:

z depending on the severity of the

accident,

z depending on the type of impact,

z within the range shown in the illustration

on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or

front passenger side,

z together with the side airbag system

z irrespective of seat occupancy

recognition,

z independently of the front airbag

system.

When the curtain airbag is triggered it

inflates within milliseconds and provides a

safety barrier in the head area on the

respective side of the vehicle. This reduces

the risk of injury to the head considerably in

case of a side impact.

86 Seats, interior

The curtain airbags will not be triggered in

the event of

z the ignition is switched off

z frontal collisions

z accidents in which the vehicle overturns

z collisions involving a rear impact

z collisions involving a side impact outside

the passenger cell.

Control indicator v for airbag systems

The operation of the airbag systems is

electronically monitored together with the

seat occupancy recognition systems 3 and

the belt tensioners and indicated on the

instrument panel by the control

indicator v. When the ignition is switched

on, the control indicator illuminates for

approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate,

does not go off after 4 seconds or

illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in

the airbag systems, the seat occupancy

recognition system 3 or the belt tensioners,

see page 73. The systems may not activate

if an accident occurs.

Deployment of the airbags is indicated by

continuous illumination of v.

The system’s integrated self-diagnostics

allows faults to be quickly remedied.

If control indicator v in the instrument

panel fails, for reasons of safety, the

text AIrbAG appears in the odometer

display.

The text is acknowledged by pressing the

reset button. It then disappears from the

odometer display 10 seconds later.

9 Warning

There must be no objects in the area in

which the airbag inflates. Do not place

the hands or arms on the covers of the

airbag systems. Important information –

see page 89.

The three-point seat belt must always be

correctly fitted – see page 71.

9 Warning

Have the cause of the fault eliminated

immediately by a workshop.

87Seats, interior

Seat occupancy recognition 3

The seat occupancy recognition system

deactivates the front and side airbags for

the front passenger if the front passenger

seat is not occupied or a Vauxhall child

restraint system with transponders 3 is

fitted on the front passenger seat. The

curtain airbag system 3 remains activated.

The control indicator for seat occupancy

recognition

y is located in the instrument

panel. If control indicator

y illuminates for

approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is

switched on, the vehicle is equipped with

seat occupancy recognition – see page 88,

Fig. S 12161.

If a Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3 is fitted, the control

indicator

y lights up continuously after

the ignition is switched on as soon as the

system has detected the child restraint

system. Only then may the child restraint

system with transponders 3 be used on the

passenger seat.

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition

can also be identified by the sticker on the

side of the instrument panel, see figure

above.

Vauxhall child restraint systems with

transponders 3 are automatically

detected if correctly fitted to the front

passenger seat. When these child restraint

systems are being used on the front

passenger seat, the front and side airbag

systems for the front passenger seat are

deactivated. The curtain airbag system

remains activated. Pay attention to control

indicator

y for seat occupancy

recognition 3 – see page 88.

Vauxhall child restraint systems with

transponders 3 can be identified by a

sticker.

9 Warning

Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with

transponders 3 can be fitted on the front

passenger seats. Use of systems without

transponders poses a risk of fatal injury.

88 Seats, interior

Control indicator y for Vauxhall child

restraint systems with transponders 3

The presence of a Vauxhall child restraint

system with transponders 3 is indicated

after the ignition has been switched on by

permanent illumination of the control

indicator

y in the instrument panel, as

soon as the seat occupancy recognition

system has detected the child restraint

system.

If the control indicator does not come on

while driving, the front and side airbags for

the passenger are not de-activated and

there is a risk of injury or death to the child.

Fit child restraint systems on the rear seat.

Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a

workshop.

If the child restraint system is not correctly

fitted or the transponders are defective the

control indicator flashes. Check that child

restraint system is correctly fitted. For

fitting child restraint system with

transponders 3, see instructions provided

with child restraint system.

If the control indicator flashes when the

child restraint system with transponders 3

is correctly fitted, there is a fault with risk of

injury to the child. Fit the child restraint

system on the rear seat. Have the cause of

the fault eliminated by a workshop.

89Seats, interior

If no Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3 is fitted, the control

indicator must not light or flash as the

passenger airbag systems would not

deploy. Have the cause of the fault

eliminated by a workshop.

Important

z Do not fit accessories or place objects in

the expansion zone of the airbag

systems - risk of injury if airbags are

deployed.

z Do not place any objects between the

airbag systems and the vehicle

occupants; danger of injury.

z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to

hang up light articles of clothing or coat

hangers. Do not place any objects in the

pockets of the hanging items – risk of

injury.

z The airbag systems and belt tensioner

control electronics can be found in the

centre console area. In order to avoid

malfunctions, do not store magnetic

objects in this area.

z Do not stick anything on the steering

wheel, instrument panel, front seat

backrests or roof frame in the vicinity of

the airbags, or on the front passenger

seat cushion, or cover any of those areas

with other materials.

z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to

clean the steering wheel, instrument

panel, front seat backrests, roof frame

and seat cushion of the front passenger

seat. Do not use any aggressive cleaning

agents.

z Only protective covers which are

approved for your vehicle with side

airbag 3 may be fitted on the front

seats. When fitting the protective covers,

make sure that the airbag units on the

outboard sides of the front seat

backrests are not covered.

9 Warning

If the Vauxhall child restraint system with

transponders 3 has been fitted

according to the instructions, the control

indicator for Vauxhall child restraint

systems with transponders must

illuminate in the instrument panel when

the ignition is switched on.

If the control indicator does not come on

while driving, the passenger airbag

systems are not de-activated and there is

a risk of injury or death. In this case fit

child restraint systems on the rear seat.

Have the cause of the fault eliminated by

a workshop.

9 Warning

Never carry child restraint systems or

other objects on your lap - risk of fatal

injury.

90 Seats, interior

z The airbag systems are triggered

independently of each other based on

the severity of the accident and the type

of impact. The side airbag system 3 and

the curtain airbag system 3 are

triggered together.

z Each airbag deploys once only. Have a

workshop replace deployed airbags

immediately.

z The speeds, directions of movement and

deformation properties of the vehicles,

and the properties of the obstacle

concerned, determine the severity of the

accident and triggering of the airbags.

The degree of damage to your vehicle

and the resulting repair costs alone are

not indicative that the criteria for

triggering of the airbags were met.

z Do not perform any alterations on the

components of the airbag system, as this

would render the vehicle unroadworthy.

z We recommend having the steering

wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling

parts, the door seals, the handles and

the seats removed by a workshop.

z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety

instructions given for this must be

observed. Take the vehicle to a recycling

company for disposal.

z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should

only travel on the rear seats. This does

not apply to children who are travelling

in child restraint systems with

transponders 3.

z In vehicles with seat occupancy

recognition 3, do not place any heavy

objects on the front passenger seat

otherwise the airbag systems for the

front passenger seat may be triggered in

the event of an accident.

z In vehicles with seat occupancy

recognition 3, to prevent malfunctions

do not use protective covers or seat

cushions on the front passenger seat.

9 Warning

The systems can be triggered abruptly

and cause injury if they are handled

improperly.

91Seats, interior

z In order to prevent malfunctions when

using a Vauxhall child restraint system

with transponders 3 on the front

passenger seat, no objects (e.g. plastic

sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be

placed under the child restraint system.

Use of child restraint systems 3 on the

front passenger seat in vehicles with

airbag -systems, but without seat

occupancy recognition 3

9 Warning

Child restraint systems as well as other

objects must never be carried on the lap

of passengers; risk of fatal injury. If

carried in this way, child restraint systems

with transponders 3 in vehicles with seat

occupancy recognition 3 could lead to

front passenger airbag systems not

being triggered in the event of an

accident.

9 Warning

Vehicles with passenger airbag and no

side airbag 3: child seats facing the rear

of the vehicle must not be fitted to the

passenger seat, risk of fatal injury. Child

seats facing the front (child safety seats

for weight ranges I, II and III – see

following pages) are permitted on the

passenger seat, providing that it is

pushed back as far as possible and the

backrest has been adjusted so that the

lap belt fits snugly.

92 Seats, interior

Vehicles with front passenger airbag can

be recognised by the word AIRBAG above

the glove compartment and the warning

sticker on the sun visor of the passenger

seat – see Fig. 17424 T. In some versions

the warning sticker may be on the side of

the instrument panel – see Fig. 17118 T.

A vehicle with side airbags can be

identified by the word AIRBAG on the

outboard sides of the front seat backrests.

Seat occupancy recognition 3

– see page 87.

Use of child restraint systems 3 on front

passenger seat in vehicles with airbag

systems 3 and with seat occupancy

recognition 3

Country-specific version.

9 Warning

Vehicles with side airbag 3: No child

restraint system 3 may be fitted on the

front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury.

9 Warning

Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with

transponders 3 can be fitted on the front

passenger seats. Use of systems without

transponders poses a risk of fatal injury.

93Seats, interior

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition

can be identified by control indicator

y in

the instrument panel. If control indicator

illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when the

ignition is switched on, the vehicle is

equipped with seat occupancy recognition,

see page 87.

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition

can also be identified by the sticker on

the side of the instrument panel

– see Fig. 17625 J.

The seat occupancy recognition system

detects Vauxhall child restraint systems

with transponders 3 and switches off the

front and side airbag systems for the front

passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag

system remains activated. Seat occupancy

recognition – see page 87.

Vauxhall child restraint systems with

transponders 3 can be identified by a

sticker or badge, see illustration.

94 Seats, interior

Cigarette lighter 3

The cigarette lighter is in the front centre

console.

Press in cigarette lighter with ignition

switched on. Switches off automatically

when element is glowing. Withdraw

cigarette lighter.

Accessory socket 3

The socket in the centre console and the

cigarette lighter socket can be used to

connect electrical accessories. The sockets

are ready for operation when the ignition is

switched on. If the engine is not running the

battery will be discharged. More accessory

sockets 3 can be found in the centre

console beneath the rear air vents and in

the Travel Assistant 3.

Do not damage the sockets by using

unsuitable plugs.

The maximum power consumption

of electrical accessories must not

exceed 120 watts.

Do not connect any current-delivering

accessories, e.g. electrical charging

devices or batteries.

Electrical accessories connected to the

socket must comply with the

electromagnetic compatibility

requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839,

otherwise vehicle malfunctions may occur.

Accessory sockets in the Travel

Assistant 3 – see page 60.

95Seats, interior

Ashtray

To be used only for ash and not for

combustible rubbish.

Front ashtray

The ash tray is in the front centre console

beneath a cover.

The cover opens when pressed at the point

indicated.

To empty, grip both sides of the ashtray

insert at the spots illustrated and pull

upwards.

Rear ashtray 3

The ash tray is in the rear centre console.

The cover opens when pressed at the point

indicated.

To empty: open the ashtray, press the

spring (arrow) and pull out the ashtray.

9 Warning

Failure to observe these descriptions can

lead to injuries which may be fatal.

Vehicle passengers should be informed

accordingly.

96 Seats, interior

Stowage compartments

Glove compartment

To open, pull handle upwards.

On the inside of the glove compartment

cover there is a pen holder.

The glove compartment should remain

closed while driving.

Cooled glove compartment 3

– see page 143.

Centre console stowage compartment 3

Division of the stowage compartment can

be changed by moving the partition in the

side guides.

Stowage compartment in the roof lining 3

To open, press the marked point.

The maximum permitted storage

compartment load is 0.4 kg per

compartment.

The storage compartments must be closed

when the vehicle is in motion.

97Seats, interior

Stowage compartments in the luggage

compartment

To access press down both bars and open

the cover.

Warning triangle ¨ 3 and first-aid kit + 3

stowage – see page 232.

Stowing the spare wheel – see page 233.

Jack and vehicle tools stowage – see

page 235.

Drink holders

Drink holders, front 3

The drink holder can be found between

the front seats in the centre console: slide

cover 3 open.

Drinks holders, rear 3

The drink holder is in the console beneath

the centre seat. Swivel out the drink holder.

Fold over middle rear seat cushion – see

page 57.

Drink holder in Travel Assistant 3 – see

page 60.

Sun visors

Use the sun visor to protect from glare by

pulling it down and swivelling it to the side.

During driving, the mirrors in the sun visors

should be covered.

98 Instruments, controls

Instruments, controls

Control indicators

The control indicators described here are

not present in all vehicles. The description

applies to all instrument versions.

The control indicator colours mean:

Turn signal lights

Control indicator flashes green.

The control indicator flashes on the

respective side.

Both control indicators flash with the

hazard warning lights on.

Rapid flashes: A turn signal light or the

related fuse has failed, failure of turn signal

light on the trailer 3.

Change bulbs – see page 249.

Fuses – see page 243.

Engine oil pressure

Control indicator lights up red

It illuminates when the ignition is switched

on and goes out shortly after the engine

starts.

Illuminates when the engine is running

Engine lubrication may be interrupted. This

may result in damage to the engine and/or

locking of the drive wheels:

1. Depress clutch.

2. Shift manual transmission or

Easytronic 3 into neutral; for automatic

transmission 3, set selector lever to N.

3. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly

as possible without impeding other

vehicles.

4. Switch off ignition.

Contact a workshop.

Control indicators ................................ 98

Instrument display............................... 105

Information display ............................. 108

Warning buzzers.................................. 126

Windscreen wipers............................... 126

z Red

Danger, important reminder,

z Yellow

Warning, note, fault

z Green

On confirmation,

z Blue

On confirmation,

9 Warning

When the engine is off, considerably

more force is needed to brake and steer.

Do not remove key until vehicle has come

to a standstill, otherwise the steering

column lock could engage unexpectedly.

99Instruments, controls

Brake system, clutch system

Control indicator lights or flashes red.

It comes on when the ignition is switched on

if the hand brake is applied or if the brake

and clutch fluid level is too low. For further

instructions – see pages 209, 272.

For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control

indicator flashes for a few seconds when

the ignition is turned off if the hand brake

is not applied.

9 Warning

Illuminate if the handbrake has been

released: stop vehicle and interrupt

journey immediately. Contact a

workshop for assistance.

Alternator

Control indicator lights or flashes red.

It illuminates when the ignition is switched

on and goes out shortly after the engine

starts.

Flashing while starting

Battery voltage too low. Have electrical

system tested by a workshop.

Illuminates when the engine is running

Stop and switch engine off. Battery will not

be charged. Engine cooling may be

interrupted. Effect of brake servo unit may

stop in vehicles with diesel engines.

Contact a workshop for assistance.

Airbag systems 3, belt tensioners 3

Control indicator lights up red

Illuminates when the engine is running

Fault in the airbag systems, seat

occupancy recognition 3 or belt tensioner –

see pages 73, 86.

100 Instruments, controls

Coolant temperature

Control indicator lights up red

Illuminates when the engine is running

Stop and turn engine off, coolant

temperature is too high. Risk of engine

damage. For coolant temperature display

see page 106. Check coolant level

immediately – see page 270.

Exterior lights

Control indicator lights green.

It is illuminated when the exterior lighting is

on – see page 128.

SPORT mode of automatic transmission 3

Symbol is lit in the transmission display if

the SPORT mode 3 is selected.

Further information – see page 178.

Winter program of automatic

transmission 3 or Easytronic 3

Symbol lights in gear display with Winter

program engaged.

Further information – see pages 172, 180.

(

Door open

Control indicator lights up red

It illuminates with the doors open.

Easytronic 3, start engine

Control indicator lights up yellow.

It illuminates if the foot brake is not

operated. The indicator goes off as soon as

the foot brake is operated. The engine can

only be started with the foot brake

operated, see page 169.

Bulb replacement 3

Control indicator lights up red

It illuminates if a bulb is defective. Check

the lights and replace any defective bulbs.

Replacing bulbs, see page 249.

101Instruments, controls

Bootlid open

Control indicator lights up red

It illuminates with the luggage

compartment open, to close luggage

compartment – see page 34.

Fog lights 3

Control indicator lights green.

It is illuminated when the fog lights are on –

see page 130.

Main beam

Control indicator lights blue.

It is illuminated when main beam is on and

during headlight flash – see pages 7, 128.

Fog tail light

Control indicator lights up yellow.

It is illuminated when the rear fog lights are

on – see page 131.

Parking distance sensor 3

Control indicator lights up yellow.

Fault in system. Contact a workshop for

help.

Parking distance sensor – see page 202.

Continuous Damping Control 3,

SPORT mode

Control indicator lights up yellow.

Fault in system. Contact a workshop for

help.

Further information – see page 198.

Seat belt 3

Control indicator lights up red

It illuminates once the ignition has been

switched on until the seat belt is put on.

A warning buzzer also sounds once the car

has started moving.

Putting on a seat belt – see page 71.

Engine electronics, transmission

electronics 3, diesel fuel filter 3,

immobiliser

Control indicator lights or flashes yellow.

It illuminates for a few seconds when the

ignition is switched on.

Illuminates when the engine is running

Fault in engine or gearbox electronic

system. Electronics have switched on

emergency running program fuel

consumption may be increased and

the vehicle’s driveability reduced –

see page 192. Contact a workshop

immediately.

Diesel engines

Z19DTL, Z19DT,

Z 19 DTH: Have water drained from diesel

fuel filter – see page 270.

Flashes when the ignition is on

Fault in the electronic immobiliser system;

the engine cannot be started – see

page 27.

Sales designation – see page 281.

102 Instruments, controls

Preheating system 3, diesel particle

filter 3

Control indicator lights or flashes yellow.

Lights

Preheating system active, switches on only

if outside temperature is low.

Flashing

(in vehicles with diesel particle filter)

The driving situation is such that the diesel

particle filter self-cleaning function can not

operate automatically. You may continue

to drive the vehicle normally. The vehicle

will not be damaged and does not require

service.

The self-cleaning function will

automatically operate while driving after

the engine has reached its normal

operating temperature. The control

indicator

! will continue to flash until the

self-cleaning operation is complete. This

may take up to 20 minutes of driving. The

time will be shorter at higher vehicle

speeds.

Further information – see page 194.

Coolant level

Control indicator lights up yellow.

Illuminates when the engine is running

Coolant fluid level too low. Stop, turn off

engine. Check coolant fluid level

immediately – see page 271.

Anti-lock Braking System

Control indicator lights up red

Illuminates while driving

Fault in anti-lock braking system –

see page 210.

103Instruments, controls

Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering

Control indicator lights up red

Fault in electro-hydraulic power assisted

steering system. The power assisted

steering may have failed. The vehicle can

be steered but considerably more force is

required. Contact a workshop for

assistance.

Electronic Stability Program (ESP®

Plus

) 3

Control indicator flashes or lights yellow.

Flashing during driving

System actively engaged, see page 196.

Illuminates while driving

System switched off or fault in the

electronic stability program system – see

page 196.

Seat occupancy recognition 3

Symbol is lit, or flashes in the kilometre

display.

Illuminates

Seat occupancy recognition has detected

a child restraint system with transponders.

Airbag systems for the front seat

passenger are deactivated, see page 87.

If it flashes

Fault in the system or child seats with

transponder fitted incorrectly, see page 87.

Engine oil level 3

Control indicator lights up yellow.

The engine oil level is checked

automatically.

Illuminates when the engine is running

Engine oil level too low. Check engine oil

level and top up engine oil if necessary –

see page 268.

Cruise control 3

Control indicator lights green.

It is illuminated when the system is on – see

page 200.

Fuel level

Control indicator lights or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserve area.

Flashing

Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately.

Never let the tank run dry!

Erratic fuel supply can cause catalytic

converter to overheat – see page 190.

Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed

the fuel system as described on page 226.

104 Instruments, controls

Exhaust gases 3

Control indicator lights or flashes yellow.

It illuminates when the ignition is switched

on and goes out shortly after the engine

starts.

Illuminates when the engine is running

Fault in emission control system. The

permitted emissions may be exceeded.

Contact a workshop immediately.

If it flashes when the engine is running

Fault that may cause damage to the

catalytic converter – see page 192. Contact

a workshop for assistance immediately.

Tyre pressure monitoring system 3

Control indicator lights up red

Tyre pressure difference, check tyre

pressure at next opportunity.

Control indicator flashes red

Considerable pressure difference or direct

loss of pressure, stop immediately and

check tyres and tyre pressure.

Control indicator lights up yellow

Fault in system. Contact a workshop for

help.

Tyre pressure monitoring system – see

page 204.

Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL)

Control indicator flashes yellow.

Flashing

Fault in system. Contact a workshop for

help.

Flashing for 4 seconds when the ignition is

switched on

System adjusted for driving abroad.

AFL – see page 132.

105Instruments, controls

Instrument display

Tachometer

Indicates engine speed.

Warning zone: Maximum permissible

engine speed exceeded; danger to engine.

Speedometer

Indicates the vehicle speed.

Odometer

Records the miles driven.

Display in the event of airbag system

malfunction – see page 86.

Trip odometer

Display of miles covered since reset.

To set to zero, hold reset knob down for

approx. 2 seconds with ignition switched

on.

106 Instruments, controls

Coolant temperature display

For physical reasons, the engine

temperature gauge shows the coolant

temperature only if the coolant level is

adequate.

During operation the system is pressurised.

The temperature may therefore rise briefly

to over 100 °C.

Fuel gauge

Never run the tank dry!

Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed

the fuel system as described on page 226.

Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,

the amount of fuel required to fill the tank

may be less than the specified tank

capacity.

Pointer in zone at

left

= Engine operating

temperature not

yet reached

Pointer between

the zones

= Normal operating

temperature

Pointer in

warning zone at

right or W is

illuminated

= Temperature too

high: Stop. Switch

off engine. Risk of

engine damage.

Check coolant level

immediately, see

page 271.

Pointer in

left zone or

Y illuminated

= Reserve area

Pointer in

left zone or

Y flashing

= Refuelling, see

page 189

107Instruments, controls

Transmission display 3

Display of gear selected for automatic

transmission 3 or current gear or mode for

Easytronic 3.

For Easytronic 3, the display flashes for a

few seconds if A, M or R is selected when

the engine is running but the foot brake is

not depressed.

InSP Service interval display 3

When InSP appears in the odometer

display, make an appointment with a

workshop for servicing as soon as possible.

We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised

Repairer.

Maintenance, inspection system – see

page 266.

P Automatic transmission park

position

R Reverse gear

N Neutral

A Automatic mode on Easytronic

M Manual mode on Easytronic

D Automatic mode on automatic

transmission

1-5 Manual mode, current gear on

Easytronic

1-5

1-6 3

Manual mode, selected gear on

automatic

108 Instruments, controls

Information display

Triple information display

Display of time, outside temperature and

date/infotainment system 3 (when it is on).

When the ignition is off, the time, date

and outside temperature can be presented

for 15 seconds by briefly pressing one of

the two buttons below the display.

Display F in the display indicates a fault.

Have the cause eliminated by a workshop.

Board information display 3

Display of time, outside temperature and

date/infotainment system 3 (when it is on).

Display F in the display indicates a fault.

Have the cause eliminated by a workshop.

Graphical information display 3,

colour information display 3

Display of time, outside temperature, date/

infotainment system 3 (when it is on) and

climate control system 3.

The graphical information display presents

the information in monochrome. The colour

information display presents the

information in colour.

12:01 17,0°C

FM 3 90,6MHz

REG AS RDS TP

11:25} 21.5°C

Range

RDS [TP]

257miles

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1 All values

BC 2

257.0 miles

Timer

Ø40mph

11.0 gal

Ø 17.0 miles/gal

109Instruments, controls

The type of information and how it is

displayed depends on the equipment

of the vehicle and the Infotainment

system 3,trip computer3 and climate

control system 3 settings.

Some information appears in the display in

an abbreviated form.

For Infotainment system see Infotainment

system instructions. For climate control

system see page 156.

Display F in the display indicates a fault.

Have the cause eliminated by a workshop.

Outside temperature

A fall in temperature is indicated

immediately and a rise in temperature

after a time delay.

If outside temperature drops to 3 °C, the

symbol : illuminates in the triple

information display or the board

information display 3 as a warning for icy

road surfaces. : remains illuminated until

temperatures reach at least 5 °C.

In vehicles with graphical information

display 3 or colour information display 3,

an icy road surface warning message

appears in the display. No message is

displayed if the temperature is less

than -5 °C.

8:56 -5,5°C

07.04.2004

9 Warning

Caution: The road surface may already

be icy even though the display indicates

a few degrees above 0 °C.

Slippery road

-2,5°C

110 Instruments, controls

Triple information display

Set date and time

Infotainment system off: press Ö and ;

below the display as follows:

Correcting time

Some RDS transmitters do not send a

correct time signal. If the incorrect time is

continually displayed, deactivate

automatic time synchronisation 3, see next

column, and set the time manually.

The automatic setting is indicated by } in

the display.

Deactivating/activating automatic time

synchronisation: infotainment system off,

press Ö and ; below the display:

Press Ö for approx. 2 seconds:

Day flashes

;:Set day

Ö:Month flashes

;:Set month

Ö:Year flashes

;:Set year

Ö:Hours flash

;: Set hours

Ö: Minutes flash

;:Set minutes

Ö:Clock is started.

8:56 5,5°C

07.04.2004

Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., clock

display is now in setting mode.

Press Ö twice (until year flashes).

Press Ö and hold down for approx.

3 seconds until } flashes in display 3

and text "RDS TIME" appears

(years flash during this time).

Press ;; display shows:

RDS TIME 0 = Off

Press ;; display shows:

RDS TIME 1 = On

Press Ö three times.

111Instruments, controls

Board information display 3,

selecting functions

Functions and settings of some

equipment 3 can be accessed via the

board information display.

This is done using the menus and the

buttons/four-way button on the

Infotainment system 3 or the left-hand

adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.

The respective menu options are then

shown in the following lines on the display.

If Check Control warning messages 3 are

displayed, the display is blocked to other

displays. Confirm the warning message. If

there are several warning messages,

confirm one after the other.

To select with four-way button:

Select options via the menus and with the

buttons/four-way button on the

infotainment system 3.

To select using the left adjuster wheel 3

on the steering wheel

Push upwards

Previous menu item.

Push downwards

Next menu item.

Press

Selection of marking, confirmation of

commands.

System settings – see page 112.

Trip computer 3 – see page 114.

11:25} 21.5°C

Range

257miles

112 Instruments, controls

Board information display 3,

system settings

Press the Settings button of the

infotainment system. Menu item Audio

or System will appear.

Press the lower button of the four-way

button to reach menu item System. After

pressing the right-hand part of the four-

way button, the first function of the System

menu is shown.

Some information appears in the display in

an abbreviated form.

The functions are displayed in the following

order:

z Time synchronisation

z Time, setting hours

z Time, setting minutes

z Date, setting day

z Date, setting month

z Date, setting year

z Ignition logic

z Language selection

z Setting units of measure

Correcting time 3

Some RDS transmitters do not send a

correct time signal. If the incorrect time is

continually displayed, deactivate

automatic time synchronisation 3 and set

the time manually – see next page.

11:25} 21.5°C

System

11:25} 21.5°C

Clock Sync.On

113Instruments, controls

The automatic setting is indicated by } in

the display.

To correct time with the help of RDS, select

the menu item for time synchronisation

from the Settings menu.

Make the desired setting.

Setting date and time

Select the menu item for time and date

setting from the Settings menu.

Make the desired setting.

The setting is executed upon exit from the

menu item.

Ignition logic 3

Adjustment, see infotainment system

instructions.

Language selection

You can select the display language for

some functions.

Select the menu item for language from

the Settings menu and make the desired

setting.

Setting units of measure

You can select which units of measure are

to be used.

Select the menu item for units of measure

from the Settings menu and make the

desired setting.

11:25} 21.5°C

Deutsch

11:25} 21.5°C

Unit Europe-SI

114 Instruments, controls

Board information display 3,

trip computer 3

The trip computer provides information on

driving data, which is continually recorded

and evaluated electronically.

Access trip computer vehicle data by

pressing the BC button on the infotainment

system or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the

steering wheel.

Some information appears in the display in

an abbreviated form.

Once an audio function has been selected,

the subsequent rows of the trip computer

function are displayed.

The functions are displayed in the following

order:

z Instantaneous consumption

z Average consumption

z Effective consumption

z Average speed

z Distance travelled

z Range

z Stop watch

Instantaneous consumption

Display changes depending on speed:

Average consumption

Average consumption display.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any

time and restarted, see "Resetting the trip

computer information".

Effective consumption

Fuel consumption display. Measurement

may be reset to zero at any time and

restarted, see "Resetting the trip computer

information".

Average speed

Average speed display. Measurement may

be reset to zero at any time and restarted,

see "Resetting the trip computer

information".

Stoppages in the journey with the ignition

off are not included in the calculations.

Distance travelled

Distance travelled display. Measurement

may be reset to zero at any time and

restarted, see "Resetting the trip computer

information".

Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h),

Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h).

11:25} 21.5°C

Inst. Consumpt.

17.6miles/gal

115Instruments, controls

Range

Range is calculated from current fuel tank

content and instantaneous consumption.

The display shows average values.

After refuelling, the vehicle updates the

range automatically after a brief delay.

If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven

with the fuel remaining in the tank, the

warning "Range" appears on the display.

If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven

with the fuel remaining in the tank, the

warning "Refuel!" 3 appears on the

display.

Acknowledge the menu item as described

on page 111.

Resetting trip computer information

The following trip computer information

can be reset (reset to zero and

measurements/calculations restarted):

z Average consumption

z Effective consumption

z Average speed

z Distance travelled.

Select the desired trip computer

information.

Reset using the left wheel on the steering

wheel or the right/left button of the four-

way button:

z Press for more than 2 seconds: Current

value.

z Press for more than 4 seconds: All values.

Stop watch

Operation with the four-way button:

z Press right button: Start/Stop.

z Press left button for more

than 2 seconds: Reset.

Operating using the left adjuster wheel 3

on the steering wheel:

z Press: Start/Stop.

Interruption of power supply

If the power supply has been interrupted or

if the battery voltage has dropped too low,

the values stored in the trip computer will

be lost.

11:25} 21.5°C

Range

257miles

11:25} 21.5°C

Stop Watch

01:22:32h

116 Instruments, controls

Graphical information display 3

or colour information display 3,

selecting functions

The functions and settings of some

equipment 3 can be accessed via the

graphical information display or the colour

information display.

Functions are selected and executed in the

menu on the display using the four-way

button, the multifunction button 3 on the

infotainment system or the left wheel 3 on

the steering wheel.

If Check Control warning messages 3 are

displayed, the display is blocked to other

displays. Confirm the warning message. If

there are several warning messages,

confirm one after the other.

To select with four-way button

Select menu items via menus and with the

buttons/four-way button of the

infotainment system.

To select using the multifunction button

Turn

Marking of menu options or commands,

selection of function ranges,

Press

Selection of marking, confirmation of

commands.

To exit a menu, turn the multifunction

button left or right to Return or Main and

select.

FM [TP] CDin

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

19,5° 19:36

117Instruments, controls

To select using the left adjuster wheel 3

on the steering wheel

Push upwards

Previous menu item.

Push downwards

Next menu item.

Press

Selection of marking, confirmation of

commands.

Function ranges

For each functional area there is a main

page (Main), which is selected at the top

edge of the display (not with the

Infotainment system CD 30 or the Mobile

Phone Portal):

z Audio

z Navigation 3

z Telephone 3

z Trip computer 3.

For audio, navigation 3 and telephone

functions 3, see infotainment system

instructions.

System settings

The settings are accessed via the Settings

menu.

Press the Main button 3 (not found on all

infotainment systems) on the infotainment

system (call up main display).

Press the Settings button of the

infotainment system. No menu may be

selected with Infotainment System CD 30.

The Settings menu is displayed.

FM [TP] CDin

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

19,5° 19:36

7 Settings 19,5° 19:36

Time, Date 19:36

Language

Units 10 . 07 . 2004

Contrast

Day / Night

6 Ign. logic

118 Instruments, controls

Setting the date and time 3

Select menu item Time, Date from

the Settings menu.

The menu for Time, Date is displayed.

Select the menu items required:

Make the desired setting.

Correcting time

For systems with GPS receiver

, time and

date are automatically set upon receipt of

a GPS satellite signal. If the displayed time

does not correspond to local time, time can

be manually corrected in 30-minute

increments or automatically corrected via

receipt of an RDS time signal

Some RDS transmitters do not send correct

time signals. If the incorrect time is

displayed often, deactivate automatic

time synchronisation 3 and set the time

manually.

To correct time with the help of RDS, select

menu item Synchron. clock automatical.

from the Time, Date menu.

The box in front of Synchron. clock

automatical. will be ticked;

see Fig. 17340 T.

Language selection

You can select the display language for

some functions.

Select menu item Language from the

Settings menu.

The available languages are displayed.

7 Time, Date 19,5° 19:36

Time 19:36

Date 10 . 07 . 2004

6 Synchron. clock automatical.

GPS = Global Positioning System, satellite

system for world-wide positioning.

RDS = Radio Data System.

7 Settings 19,5° 19:36

Time, Date

Language Deutsch

Units English

Contrast Español

Day / Night Nederlands

6 Ign. logic Français

119Instruments, controls

Select the desired language.

Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of

the menu item.

In systems with voice output 3, when the

language setting of the display is changed

the system will ask whether the

announcement language should also be

changed – see Infotainment system

instructions.

Setting units of measure

You can select which units of measure are

to be used.

Select menu item Units from the Settings

menu.

The available units are displayed.

Select the desired unit.

Selections are indicated by a o in front of

the menu item.

Adjusting contrast 3

(Graphical information display)

Select menu item Contrast from the

Settings menu.

The menu for Contrast is displayed.

Confirm the required setting.

7 13 Languages 19,5° 19:36

X Deutsch

English

Español

Nederlands

Français

Italiano

7 Settings 19,5° 19:36

Time, Date

Language

~ Europe-SI

Units

| Japan

Contrast

| Great Britain

Day / Night

| USA

6 Ign. logic

7 Contrast 19,5° 19:36

120 Instruments, controls

Setting display mode 3

The display can be adjusted to suit the light

conditions, black or coloured text on a light

background or white or coloured text on a

dark background.

Select menu item Day / Night from the

Settings menu.

The options are displayed.

Automatic: adapted based on vehicle

lighting.

Always day design: black or coloured text

on light background.

Always night design: white or coloured

text on dark background.

Selections are indicated by a o in front of

the menu item.

Ignition logic 3

Adjustment, see infotainment system

instructions.

Graphical information display 3

or colour information display 3,

trip computer 3

The trip computers provide information on

driving data, which is continually recorded

and evaluated electronically.

The trip computer main page (Main)

provides information about range,

average fuel consumption 3 and current

consumption.

To display other trip computer data, press

the BC button on the infotainment

system 3, select the trip computer menu

on the display or press the left adjuster

wheel 3 on the steering wheel.

Range

Range is calculated from current fuel tank

content and instantaneous consumption.

The display shows average values.

After refuelling, the vehicle updates the

range automatically after a brief delay.

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1 All values

BC 2

257.0 miles

Timer

Ø40mph

Tyres

11.0 gal

Ø 17.0 miles/gal

Range

257

miles

Aver. Consump.

17.6

miles/gal

Inst. consumpt.

17.6

miles/gal

19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36

121Instruments, controls

If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven

with the fuel remaining in the tank, the

warning "Range" appears on the display.

If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven

with the fuel remaining in the tank, the

warning "Please refuel!" 3 appears on the

display. At that point "Please refuel!" 3 will

also be displayed on the trip computer

main page (Main) instead of "Range".

Acknowledge the menu item as described

on page 116.

Instantaneous consumption

Display changes depending on speed:

Distance travelled

Distance travelled display. Measurement

may be reset to zero at any time and

restarted, see "Resetting the trip computer

information".

Average speed

Average speed calculation. Measurement

may be reset to zero at any time and

restarted, see "Resetting the trip computer

information".

Stoppages in the journey with the ignition

off are not included in the calculations.

Effective consumption

Fuel consumption display. Measurement

may be reset to zero at any time and

restarted, see "Resetting the trip computer

information".

Average consumption

Average consumption calculation.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any

time and restarted, see "Resetting the trip

computer information".

Resetting the trip computer information

The following trip computer information

can be reset (restart measurements):

z Distance travelled

z Average speed

z Effective consumption

z Average consumption

Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer

menu.

Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h),

Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h).

Range

33miles

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1 All values

BC 2

257.0 miles

Timer

Ø40mph

Tyres

11.0 gal

Ø 17.0 miles/gal

122 Instruments, controls

The information from both trip computers

can be reset separately, making it possible

to evaluate data over different time

periods.

Select the desired trip computer

information.

The value for the selected function will be

reset and recalculated.

To reset all information of a trip computer,

select menu item All values.

If trip computer information has been

selected, "- - -" is displayed after a reset.

The recalculated values are displayed after

a brief delay.

Interruption of power supply

If the power supply has been interrupted or

if the battery voltage has dropped too low,

the values stored in the trip computer will

be lost.

Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36

All values

257.0 miles

Ø40mph

11.0 gal

Ø 17.0 miles/gal

Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36

All values

257.0 miles

Ø40mph

11.0 gal

Ø 17.0 miles/gal

123Instruments, controls

Stop watch

Select menu item Timer from the Board

Computer menu.

The Timer menu is displayed.

To start, select menu item Start.

To reset, select menu item Reset.

The desired stop watch display can be

selected from the Options menu 3:

Driving Time excl. Stops

The time the vehicle is in motion is

recorded. Stationary time is not included.

Driving Time incl. Stops

The time the vehicle is in motion is

recorded. The time the vehicle is stationary

with the key in the ignition switch is

included.

Travel Time

Measurement of the time from manual

activation via Start to manual deactivation

via Reset.

Display of current tyre pressure 3

Select menu item Tyres from the Board

Computer menu.

The current pressure of each tyre is

displayed.

Further information – see page 204.

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1

BC 2

00:00:00

Timer

Tyres Start

Reset

Options

Ü Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

124 Instruments, controls

Check control 3

Check control monitors several fluid levels,

the tyre pressure 3, the remote control

batteries, Vauxhall alarm system 3 and the

main vehicle lighting systems, including the

cables and fuses. When towing, the trailer

lighting system is also monitored.

Once the ignition has been switched on, all

check control functions are automatically

verified.

Warning messages appear on the display.

If there are several warning messages, they

are displayed one after the other.

Some information appears in the display in

an abbreviated form.

Examples of warning messages for the

graphical information display 3 and colour

information display 3 are depicted. On the

board information display, messages

appear in an abbreviated form.

Acknowledge warning messages as

described on pages 111, 116.

Unacknowledged warning messages can

be re-displayed later.

Warning messages:

Remote Control

Battery

check

Remote control battery voltage is too low –

see page 29.

Brakelight switch

check

Fault. Brake light not illuminating when

braking occurs. Have cause of fault

remedied by a workshop immediately.

Safeguard

check

Fault. System fault in Vauxhall alarm

system. Have the cause of the fault

rectified straight away by a workshop.

Coolant level

check

125Instruments, controls

If there is a fault in the vehicle lighting

system, the respective location of the fault

is displayed as text, e.g.:

Brakelight

check right

If brake light is defective, the relevant tail

light takes over the brake light function.

In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring

system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the

display indicates which tyre to check, e.g.:

Tyre pressure

check rear

right

(value in bar)

Check tyre pressure at next opportunity

using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure

monitoring system 3 – see page 204.

Checking tyre pressure – see page 213.

In vehicles with tyre pressure control

system 3, if there is major loss of pressure

in a tyre, the display indicates the tyre at

fault, e.g.:

Attention!

Rear left tyre

pressure loss

(value in bar)

Stop immediately and check tyre and tyre

pressure. For tyre pressure monitoring

system 3 – see page 204.

Wash

Fluid Level

check

Fluid level in windscreen wash system too

low. Topping up wash fluid – see page 275.

Rear window wash system and headlight

wash system 3 are deactivated if wash

fluid level is low.

Coolant level

check

Fluid level in engine cooling system is low.

Check coolant level immediately – see

page 270.

Interruption of power supply

Stored warning messages appear on the

display one after the other.

126 Instruments, controls

Warning buzzers

When starting the engine or whilst

driving:

z If seat belt is not fastened 3.

z When driving with a door open or the

tailgate ajar.

z Once you have reached a certain speed

if the hand brake is applied 3.

z If a specified maximum speed is

exceeded 3.

z In the case of Easytronic 3 if A, M or R is

selected while the engine is running and

the driver’s door is opened but the foot

brake is not depressed.

When the vehicle is parked and the

driver’s door is opened:

z When the key is in the ignition switch 3.

z With parking lights or dipped beam

switched on.

z In the case of Easytronic 3, if the hand

brake is not applied and no gear is

engaged when the engine is off.

Windscreen wipers

To activate, press stalk briefly up

The lever always moves back to the

starting position. To shift to next higher or

lower gear: move lever slightly.

Push lever past resistance point and hold:

the windscreen wiper stages are run

through; an acoustic signal sounds at

position §.

Adjustable timed interval wipe $:

Press the stalk down from position §:

Single swipe.

§ =Off

$ = Adjustable timed interval wipe

% =Slow

& =Fast

Adjuster wheel right = Short intervals

Adjuster wheel left = Long intervals

127Instruments, controls

Automatic wiping with rain sensor 3:

To activate, press stalk briefly up

The rain sensor detects the amount of

water on the windscreen and automatically

controls the windscreen wipers. Adjust the

sensitivity of the system using the adjuster

wheel:

Keep sensor area of rain sensor clean by

operating the windscreen wash system.

Windscreen wash system and headlight

wash system 3

To activate, pull stalk on steering wheel

The wiper is switched on for several wipe

operations. A single after-wipe occurs at

speeds of up to 80 mph (130 km/h).

The headlight wash system 3 is ready for

operation when the headlights are

switched on. Wash fluid is sprayed onto the

headlights once. Then the headlight wash

system is disabled for 2 minutes.

On vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, keep

the sensor area clean.

Rear window wash and wiper system

Push stalk forward to switch on.

The rear window wiper swipes in timed

interval mode.

The tailgate wiper switches on

automatically when the windscreen wipers

are switched on and reverse gear is

engaged.

Push stalk forward again to switch off.

The rear window wash system will remain

on for as long as the stalk is held in the

forward position.

The rear window wash system is

deactivated when the fluid level is low.

$ = Automatic wiping with rain sensor

§ =Off

Adjuster wheel right = High sensitivity

Adjuster wheel left = Low sensitivity

128 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior lights

Turn light switch:

In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights and

number plate lights are also on.

Control indicator 8 – see page 100.

If the ignition is switched off with the

dipped beam or main beam on, the

parking lights illuminate 3.

Versions with daytime running lights 3:

Parking lights are on when the ignition is

switched on and the light switch is set to 7

or AUTO. Dipped beam is on when the

engine is running.

The daytime running lights switch off when

the ignition is switched off.

Follow the regulations of the country in

which you are driving when using daytime

running lights and fog lights 3.

Driving abroad – see page 136.

Exterior lights ....................................... 128

Main beam, headlight flash ............... 129

Automatic dipped beam

activation 3....................................... 129

Turn signal lights ................................. 130

Fog lights > 3 ..................................... 130

Fog tail light r .................................... 131

Reversing lights.................................... 131

Hazard warning lights......................... 131

Headlight range adjustment ?.......... 131

Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) .. 132

Door-to-door light function 3............. 133

Parking lights ....................................... 134

Instrument illumination k,

information display illumination...... 134

Courtesy light....................................... 134

Battery discharge protection.............. 136

Light covers.......................................... 136

Headlights when driving abroad ....... 136

7 =Off

8 = Parking lights

9 = Dipped or main beam

129Lighting

Main beam, headlight flash

To switch from dipped to main beam, press

stalk forwards.

To switch to dipped beam, push stalk

forward again or pull towards steering

wheel.

To activate the headlight flash, pull stalk

on steering wheel. Main beam is engaged

for the duration of activation.

The blue control indicator

C is illuminated

when main beam or headlight flash is on.

Automatic dipped beam

activation 3

Light switch to AUTO: Dipped beam

switches on or off automatically when the

engine is running based on outside light

conditions.

The exterior lights are turned off by

removing the ignition key.

For reasons of safety, the light switch

should always remain in the AUTO

position.

In poor visibility such as fog, turn the light

switch to 9.

130 Lighting

Turn signal lights

To activate, press stalk up or down.

After operation, the turn signal stalk

returns to its starting position.

If the stalk is moved past the resistance

point, the turn signal light remains on.

When the steering wheel moves back

toward the straight-ahead position, the

turn signal light is automatically

deactivated.

Tap signal: Move stalk to resistance point

and release to activate three flashes from

the turn signals when changing lanes or the

like.

Move the stalk to the resistance point and

hold for the turn signals to flash longer.

Switch the turn signal off manually by

moving the stalk slightly.

Fog lights > 3

The fog lights can only be switched on

when both the ignition and lights are on.

Stalk up = Turn signal light right

Stalk down = Turn signal light left

On = Press >, > lights in instrument

panel

Off = Press > again or switch off

ignition or light

131Lighting

Fog tail light r

The fog tail light can only be switched on

when the ignition is on and dipped beam or

parking lights are on or if the light switch is

in the AUTO 3 position and dipped beam

is active.

The fog tail lights of the vehicle are

deactivated when towing a caravan/

trailer.

Reversing lights

Come on when reverse gear is engaged

and ignition is switched on.

Hazard warning lights

To activate, press button ¨, to de-activate

press button ¨ again.

To aid location of the pushbutton, the red

surface is illuminated when the ignition

switched on. When the button is pressed,

its control indicator flashes in time with the

hazard warning lights.

The hazard warning lights switch on

automatically when the airbags are

triggered, and the central locking unlocks

all doors. Switch off hazard warning lights

with button ¨.

Headlight range adjustment ?

Manual headlight range adjustment 3

With dipped beam switched on, adjust

headlight range in four steps to suit vehicle

load. Turn wheel against resistance and

click it to the required position.

Correct adjustment of the headlight range

reduces dazzle for other road users.

Automatic level control system 3 – see

page 204.

On = Press >, > lights in instrument

panel

Off = Press > again or switch off

ignition or light

132 Lighting

Vehicles without automatic level control

system

Vehicles with automatic level control

system

Automatic headlight range adjustment 3

For vehicles with Xenon headlights,

headlight beam length is adjusted

automatically based on vehicle load.

0 = Front seats occupied

1 = All seats occupied

2 = All seats occupied and luggage

compartment load

3 = Driver’s seat occupied and luggage

compartment load

0 = Front seats occupied

1 = All seats occupied

1 = All seats occupied and luggage

compartment load

2 = Driver’s seat occupied and luggage

compartment load

Adaptive Forward Lighting 3

(AFL)

On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights,

improves illumination of

z curves (curve lighting),

z intersections and tight turns (turn

lighting).

Curve lighting

The Xenon light beam pivots based on

steering wheel position and speed (from

approx. 6 mph /10 km/h).

The headlights shine at an angle of up to

15° to the right or left of the direction of

travel.

Turn lighting

An additional light comes on at certain

steering wheel settings (after approx. 90°),

turn signal settings and speeds (up to

approx. 25 mph / 40 km/h).

The light shines approx. 90° to the left or

right of the vehicle and approx. 30 metres

to the front.

Motorway lighting

At higher speeds and continuous straight

ahead travel, the dipped beam

automatically raises slightly, thereby

increasing headlight range.

133Lighting

Control indicator B

Flashing: Fault in system. The system is not

ready for operation.

If the curve lighting swivelling device fails,

the relevant dipped beam is switched off.

The corresponding fog light is

automatically switched on for

reasons of safety.

Contact a workshop.

Flashing of control indicator

B for

approx. 4 seconds after switching on

the ignition reminds you that

the headlights have been adjusted,

see "Headlights when driving abroad",

page 136.

Door-to-door light function 3

The dipped beam and the reversing lights

light for approx. 30 seconds after the driver

has exited the vehicle and closed his door.

To activate

1. Switch off ignition.

2. Remove ignition key.

3. Open driver’s door.

4. Pull turn signal stalk toward steering

wheel.

5. Close driver’s door.

If the driver’s door is left open, the lights will

go out after two minutes.

The light is switched off immediately by

inserting the key into the ignition or pulling

the turn signal stalk again with the driver’s

door open.

134 Lighting

Parking lights

The front parking light and tail light of one

side of the vehicle can be activated when

parking:

1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3.

2. Ignition off

3. Move turn signal stalk all the way up

(right parking light) or down (left parking

light).

An acoustic signal sounds and control

indicator O illuminates briefly in the

instrument panel to indicate activation.

Remove the ignition key before leaving the

vehicle.

To switch it off, switch on the ignition or

move the turn signal stalk in the opposite

direction.

Instrument illumination k,

information display illumination

Brightness can be adjusted when the

exterior lights are on: Push to release

knob k and then turn it clockwise or

anticlockwise and hold until the desired

brightness is obtained.

Display mode 3 – see page 120.

Courtesy light

Front courtesy light

Comes on automatically when the vehicle is

unlocked with the remote control, when a

door is opened or when the key is removed

from the ignition switch after the ignition is

switched off.

Goes off automatically with delay after the

doors are closed or immediately when the

ignition is switched on or the doors are

locked.

Front courtesy light

Manual operation from inside with doors

closed:

On = Press button c

Off = Press button c again

135Lighting

Front reading lights 3

Left and right reading lights are

individually operable. With ignition on:

Courtesy lights and rear reading lights 3

The rear courtesy light comes on at the

same time as the front one.

To deactivate interior lighting 3, push

button

The rear reading lights can be switched on

separately for the left and right with

ignition switched on:

Entry lighting 3

After unlocking the vehicle, the instrument

and switch illumination as well as the

courtesy lights come on for a few seconds.

Illuminated mirror in the sun visors 3

The lighting switches on when the cover is

opened.

Glove compartment lighting

Glove compartment is illuminated when lid

is open and ignition on.

Cigarette lighter and ashtray

illumination 3

Comes on when ignition is switched on.

Luggage compartment lighting 3

Comes on when the boot lid/tailgate is

opened.

Automatically regulated centre console

lighting 3

Spotlight in housing of interior mirror.

Daylight-dependent, automatically

regulated centre console lighting with

ignition switched on.

On = Press button

Off = Press button

a again.

On = Press button a

Off = Press button a again.

136 Lighting

Battery discharge protection

To prevent the battery from becoming

discharged, the courtesy light, reading

lights, luggage compartment lighting and

glove compartment lighting switch off

automatically 5 minutes after the ignition is

switched off.

Light covers

The inside of the light covers may become

misted up for a short period during

unfavourable weather conditions, heavy

rain or after washing the vehicle. The

misting disappears automatically after a

short time, but can be speeded up by

switching the lights on.

Headlights when driving abroad

The asymmetrical dipped beam increases

the field of vision on the passenger side of

the lane.

This causes glare for oncoming traffic if the

vehicle is driven in countries where traffic

drives on the opposite side of the road.

Do as follows to prevent glare:

Vehicles with halogen - headlight system

or Xenon headlight system without

Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL)

Have the workshop convert the headlights.

Vehicles with Adaptive Forward

Lighting 3 (AFL)

1. Open fuse box cover in engine

compartment – see page 247.

2. Insert fuse (maxi-fuse) 3 in slot 37. Fuse

assignment – see page 248.

3. Switch on ignition.

Then the AFL control indicator

B flashes

for 4 seconds whenever the ignition is

switched on.

Control indicator

B – see pages 104, 133.

137Infotainment system

Infotainment system

Radio reception 3

Car radio reception differs from domestic

radio reception:

As the vehicle antenna is relatively near the

ground, the broadcasting companies

cannot guarantee the same quality of

reception as obtained with a domestic

radio using an overhead antenna.

z Changes in distance from the

transmitter,

z multi-path reception due to reflection

and

z shadowing

may cause hissing, noise, distortion or loss

of reception altogether.

Infotainment system 3

The infotainment system is operated as

described in the operating instructions.

Remote control on steering

wheel 3

The functions of the infotainment system 3

and the information display can be

operated with the adjuster wheels and

buttons on the steering wheel.

Further information – see pages 111, 116

and the relevant operating instructions.

Radio reception 3................................ 137

Infotainment system 3........................ 137

Remote control on steering wheel 3.. 137

Twin Audio 3 ....................................... 138

AUX input 3......................................... 138

Electronic data acquisition at toll

systems 3........................................... 138

Mobile telephones and radio

equipment (CB) 3 ............................. 139

138 Infotainment system

Twin Audio 3

Twin Audio gives rear seat occupants the

opportunity to listen to the audio source set

on the infotainment system 3 or one of the

other audio sources.

Only an audio source that is not currently

active on the infotainment system can be

controlled using Twin Audio.

Two headphone connections are available,

with separate volume controls.

Further information is available in the

infotainment system operating

instructions.

AUX input 3

The AUX input is in the stowage

compartment in the centre console.

An external audio source such as a

portable CD player can be connected via

the AUX input using a 3.5 mm jack.

Keep AUX input clean and dry at all times.

Further information is available in the

infotainment system operating

instructions.

Electronic data acquisition at toll

systems 3

In vehicles with heat-reflecting

windscreen

3 attach chipcard 3 for

electronic data recording and fee payment

in black area of windscreen on left or right-

hand side behind the interior mirror, see

markings in figure. Attaching the chipcard

outside this area may cause data

recording malfunctions.

Solar Reflect.

139Infotainment system

Mobile telephones and radio

equipment (CB) 3

The Vauxhall installation instructions and

the operating guidelines provided by the

telephone manufacturer must be observed

when fitting and operating a mobile

telephone. Failure to do so could

invalidate the vehicle’s operating permit

(EU Directive 95/54/EG).

Recommended prerequisites for fault-free

operation:

z Professionally installed exterior antenna

to obtain the maximum range possible.

z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt.

z Installation of the telephone in a suitable

spot (see information on page 89).

Obtain advice on predetermined

installation locations for the external

antenna and equipment holder and ways

of using devices with transmission power of

more than 10 Watts. We recommend that

you consult your Vauxhall Authorised

Repairer, who will have brackets and

various installation kits available as

accessories and will install them in

accordance with regulations.

A hands-free attachment without an

external antenna in mobile phone

standards GSM 900/1800/1900 and UMTS

must only be operated if the maximum

transmission power of the mobile phone

does not exceed 2 Watts with GSM 900 and

1 Watt in other cases. The operating

regulations stipulated by the manufacturer

of the telephone and the hands-free

attachment must be complied with.

For reasons of safety, we recommend that

you do not use the phone while driving.

Even use of a hands-free set can be a

distraction while driving. Be sure to observe

any country-specific regulations.

9 Warning

Mobile phones and radio equipment may

cause malfunctions in the vehicle

electronics if they are operated in the

vehicle without the external antenna

unless the above-mentioned regulations

are complied with.

Mobile phones that do not comply with

the above-mentioned mobile phone

standard and radio equipment must only

be operated using an antenna that is

attached to the exterior of the vehicle.

140 Climate control

Climate control

Heating and ventilation system,

air conditioning system 3

Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 are

combined into one unit that is designed to

provide comfort regardless of the season,

weather or outside temperature.

When cooling 3 is activated, the air is

cooled and dried.

The heating unit heats the air as required in

all operating modes depending on the

position of the temperature switch. The air

supply can be adjusted to suit

requirements by means of the fan.

Vehicles without an air conditioning system

do not have buttons for cooling n,

recirculation 4 or demisting and

defrosting V.

Air conditioning system 3 – see page 148.

Heating and ventilation system, air

conditioning system 3 ...................... 140

Automatic air conditioning system 3 141

Electronic climate control system 3... 141

Air vents ............................................... 142

Cooled glove compartment 3 ............ 143

Heated rear window, heated exterior

mirrors................................................ 143

Heated front seats 3........................... 144

Heated rear seats 3 ............................ 144

Driver’s seat with climate control 3 ... 144

Heating and ventilation system ......... 145

Air conditioning system 3................... 148

Automatic air conditioning system 3 150

Electronic climate control system 3... 156

Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3 .......... 163

Air intake.............................................. 166

Air outlet............................................... 166

Pollen filter ........................................... 166

Note...................................................... 166

Maintenance ........................................ 167

141Climate control

Automatic air conditioning

system 3

Provides a comfortable interior regardless

of the weather, outside temperature or

season.

When an interior temperature is set with

the temperature control, the temperature

and amount of inflowing air are

automatically regulated. A uniform,

comfortable climate in the vehicle is

thereby automatically obtained based on

outside climate conditions.

Automatic air conditioning system – see

page 150.

Electronic climate control

system 3

Offers the greatest comfort in the vehicle

interior regardless of the conditions

outside.

To ensure a uniform and comfortable

climate in the vehicle, the temperature of

inflowing air, air-flow rate and air

distribution are automatically adapted

based on the climate conditions outside

the vehicle and the current temperature of

the vehicle interior.

The set values appear on the information

display.

Electronic climate control system – see

page 156.

142 Climate control

Air vents

Pleasant ventilation to the head area

controlled by the position of the

temperature switch.

To increase the air supply, set the fan to a

higher speed and set the air distribution

switch to M.

Centre and side air vents (1)

To open vent: Turn vertical adjuster wheel

up.

Adjust the direction of air flow by turning

the horizontal and vertical adjuster wheels.

To close the vents turn the adjustment

wheel fully downwards.

Windscreen defroster nozzles (2)

Air distribution switch to

l or J: Air flows

onto windscreen and side windows.

Additional vents

can be found beneath the windscreen and

the side windows, and also in the footwell.

Rear air vents 3

To open vent: Turn vertical adjuster wheel

all the way up.

Adjust quantity of air by rotating the

control wheel.

The air flow can be directed as desired by

tilting and swivelling the slats.

To close the vents turn the adjustment

wheel fully downwards.

If the rear seats are unoccupied close the

rear nozzles to increase the air supply at

the front.

143Climate control

Cooled glove compartment 3

Cooled air is fed into the glove

compartment through a nozzle.

If glove compartment cooling is not

needed, turn the wheel downwards.

Heated rear window,

heated exterior mirrors

With the ignition on, the rear screen and

exterior mirror heating is switched on by

pressing button Ü:

LED in the button Ü on: Rear window and

exterior mirror heating on.

LED in the button Ü off: Rear window and

exterior mirror heating off.

Heating takes place with the engine

running and is switched off automatically

after approximately 15 minutes.

The heated rear window automatically

switches on when the diesel particle filter is

being cleaned 3 depending on the engine.

144 Climate control

Heated front seats 3

Two knurled wheels beneath the centre air

vent for the left and right-hand seats.

Turn relevant wheel to set required heating

level.

Control indicator above adjustment wheel.

We do not recommend prolonged use of

the highest level for people with sensitive

skin.

To switch off, set wheel to 0.

Seat heating is operational when the

ignition is on.

Heated rear seats 3

Two switches at rear of centre console in

front of the rear seats.

When the ignition is switched on, the

heating of the corresponding seat is

activated by pressing the button ß.

LED in the button ß on: Seat heating on.

LED in the button ß off: Seat heating off.

The outboard seats are heated.

Driver’s seat with climate

control 3

Knurled wheel at driver’s side below centre

air vents.

Move knurled wheel to required ventilation

or heating setting as per requirements.

Control indicator above adjustment wheel.

We do not recommend prolonged use of

the highest heating level for people with

sensitive skin.

To switch off, set wheel to 0.

Function only available with ignition

switched on.

145Climate control

Heating and ventilation system

Air distribution

Setting with the left rotary switch.

Open the air vents when the switch is set

to L or M.

Temperature

Setting with the centre rotary switch.

Air flow

Setting with the right rotary switch.

Four fan speeds:

The rate of air flow is determined by the

fan. The fan should therefore also be

switched on during a journey.

L To headroom via adjustable air

vents, to footwell

M To headroom via adjustable air

vents

l Towards windscreen and front door

windows

J To windscreen, to front side

windows, to footwell

K Towards footwell

Red area = Warm

Blue area = Cold

x Off

1-4 Selected fan speed

146 Climate control

Ventilation

z For maximum ventilation in head area:

Set air distribution switch to M, open all

vents.

z For ventilation to foot well: Set air

distribution switch to K,

z For simultaneous ventilation to the head

area and the foot well: Set air

distribution switch to L.

z Set the temperature to the desired

setting.

z Switch fan on, adjust fan setting as

desired.

Heating

The amount of heat is dependent on the

coolant temperature and is thus not fully

attained until the engine is warm.

For rapid warming of the passenger

compartment:

z Set air distribution switch to desired

position, preferably position J, see

page 145.

z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as

far as it will go (warm).

z Set the fan to speed 3.

z Open air vents.

Cars with Quickheat

3: Depending on the

outside temperature and engine

temperature, the passenger compartment

can be heated more quickly by means of

supplementary electrical heating.

The auxiliary electric heater switches itself

on automatically.

The comfort and general well-being of the

vehicle occupants are to a large extent

dependent on a suitable ventilation and

heating setting.

To obtain temperature stratification in the

vehicle with a pleasant "cool head and

warm feet" effect, move the rotary air

distribution switch to K or J, move the

rotary temperature switch to the central

position and open the centre air vents.

147Climate control

Heating the foot well

z Set air distribution switch to K.

z Set the temperature switch in the red

zone.

z Switch on fan.

Window demisting and de-icing

Misted or icy windows, such as in damp

weather, from wet clothes or when outside

temperatures are low:

z Move air distribution switch to

z For simultaneous warming of the foot

well, set air distribution switch to J.

z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as

far as it will go (warm).

z Set the fan switch to 3 or 4.

z Activate heated rear window Ü.

z Open side air vents as required and

direct them towards the side windows.

9 Warning

Disregard of the instructions could lead

to misting or icing of the windows and

subsequent accidents due to impaired

visibility.

148 Climate control

Air conditioning system 3

As a supplement to the heating and

ventilation system, the air conditioning

system cools and dehumidifies (dries)

inflowing air.

If cooling or dehumidification is not

desired, switch off cooling in order to save

fuel.

Cooling switches off automatically at low

outside temperatures.

Cooling n

Operation only with engine running and

fan switched off:

Control indicator in the button.

Air recirculation system 4

The recirculation switch 4 is used to set

the ventilation system in recirculation

mode (control indicator in the button).

If fumes or unpleasant odours penetrate

from outside: temporarily switch on air

recirculation system 4.

On = Press n

Off = Press n again

149Climate control

The switched-on air recirculation system

reduces air replacement. The humidity

increases and the windows may mist up.

The quality of the interior air deteriorates

over time, which may cause drowsiness.

Comfort setting

z Set cooling n as desired.

z Air recirculation system 4 off.

z Set air distribution switch to M or L.

z Set temperature switch as desired.

z Switch on fan at desired speed

z Open air vents as required.

Temperature switch in centre of

adjustment range: warmer air will flow into

the foot well and cooler air into the upper

zone, with warmer air coming from the side

air vents and cooler air from the centre

vents.

Maximum cooling

Open windows and sun roof 3 briefly so

that warm air can escape rapidly.

z Cooling n on.

z Set air distribution switch to M.

z Turn the temperature switch

anticlockwise as far as it will go (cold).

z Set fan switch to 4.

z Open all vents.

The system will switch automatically to

recirculation mode.

150 Climate control

Window demisting and de-icing

Misted or icy windows, such as in damp

weather, from wet clothes or when outside

temperatures are low:

z Cooling n on, the air conditioning

compressor automatically switches itself

off at low outside temperatures (icing).

z Press button V: The fan will

automatically switch to 4, air distribution

directed on to the windscreen.

z Turn the temperature switch clockwise.

z Open side air vents as required and

direct them towards door windows.

z Switch on heated rear window Ü.

To switch off, press button V again; the

air conditioning will operate at the settings

selected previously.

Automatic air conditioning

system 3

Provides a uniformly comfortable interior

regardless of the weather, outside

temperature or season.

To ensure a constant and comfortable

climate in the vehicle, the temperature of

the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are

changed automatically based on climate

conditions outside the vehicle.

Temperature changes due to external

influences, such as direct sunlight, are

automatically compensated.

9 Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could

lead to misted or icy windows and

accidents stemming from impaired

visibility.

151Climate control

Automatic mode

Basic setting for maximum comfort:

z Set fan switch to A.

z Set air distribution switch to desired

position – see next column.

z Use rotary switch to set temperature

to 22 °C (a higher or lower temperature

can be set as desired).

z Air conditioning compressor activation –

see page 152.

z All front air vents open. If desired, the

rear vents also 3.

Deactivation of the air conditioning

compressor can reduce the level of comfort

and safety – see page 152.

Air distribution

Setting with the left rotary switch.

Intermediate settings are possible.

Open the air vents when the switch is set

to L or M.

Temperature preset

Setting with the centre rotary switch.

Set the rotary switch to a value between

17 °C and 27 °C. Intermediate settings are

possible.

The selected temperature is maintained.

For reasons of comfort, temperature can

only be changed in small increments.

There is no temperature control for settings

below 17 °C (all the way left) or above

27 °C (all the way right). The air

conditioning system works at maximum

cooling or heating.

L To headroom via adjustable air

vents, to footwell

M To headroom via adjustable air

vents

l Towards windscreen and front door

windows

J To windscreen, to front side

windows, to footwell

K Towards footwell

152 Climate control

Air flow

Setting with the right rotary switch.

The fan speed regulates the rate of air flow

that is needed to maintain the pre-selected

temperature.

Select automatic mode for the highest level

of comfort.

When the fan is off, the air conditioning

compressor is also off.

To activate/deactivate air conditioning

compressor (cooling) n

Operation only with engine running and

fan switched off:

Control indicator in the button.

When the cooling (air conditioning

compressor) is active, the air is cooled and

dehumidified. If cooling or

dehumidification is not desired, switch off

cooling in order to save fuel.

Cooling switches off automatically at low

outside temperatures.

1 - 4 Manual fan speed setting,

intermediate settings are possible

A Automatic fan speed control

x Fan off

On = Press n

Off = Press n again

153Climate control

Manual air recirculation mode

The air recirculation system prevents the

entry of outside air and the air in the

passenger compartment is circulated.

Press button 4, control indicator in

button.

The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air

recirculation mode. The quality of the

passenger compartment air deteriorates

which may cause the vehicle occupants to

feel drowsy. In operation without cooling

the air humidity increases, so the windows

may mist up. Consequently, manual air

recirculation should only be run for short

periods of time.

To deactivate manual air recirculation:

Press button 4 again. The control

indicator in the button goes off.

Ventilation

z For maximum ventilation in head area:

Set air distribution switch to M and open

all vents.

z For ventilation to foot well: Set air

distribution switch to K.

z For simultaneous ventilation to the head

area and the foot well: set air distribution

switch to L.

z Set desired temperature.

z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be

manually set: Set the rotary switch to

position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are

also possible.

154 Climate control

Heating

The amount of heat is dependent on the

coolant temperature and is thus not fully

attained until the engine is warm.

For rapid warming of the passenger

compartment:

z Set the air distribution switch to the

desired position – see page 145.

z Set the centre rotary switch to the

desired temperature. We recommend a

value of about 22 °C.

z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be

manually set: Set the rotary switch to

position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are

also possible.

Cars with Quickheat

3: Depending on the

outside temperature and engine

temperature, the passenger compartment

can be heated more quickly by means of

supplementary electrical heating.

The auxiliary electric heater switches itself

on automatically.

The comfort and general well-being of the

vehicle occupants are to a large extent

dependent on a suitable ventilation and

heating setting.

To obtain temperature stratification in the

vehicle with a pleasant "cool head and

warm feet" effect, move the rotary air

distribution switch to K or J, move the

rotary temperature switch to approx. 22°

and open the centre air vents.

Maximum cooling for very hot interior

Open windows and sun roof 3 briefly so

that warm air can escape rapidly.

z Cooling n on.

z Set air distribution switch to M.

z Set the temperature switch to the desired

temperature.

z Set fan switch to A.

z Open all air vents.

155Climate control

The automatic climate control system

provides maximum cooling down to the set

value.

At settings below 17 °C (rotary switch all

the way to the left), the system continually

runs with maximum cooling. When the air

conditioning compressor is running, air

recirculation is automatically switched on.

Window demisting and de-icing

Misted or icy windows, such as in damp

weather, from wet clothes or when outside

temperatures are low:

z Cooling n on - the AC compressor

deactivates automatically when outside

temperatures are low (icing)

z Press button V: In switch position A, the

fan automatically switches to the highest

speed and air is directed to the

windscreen.

z Set temperature to maximum heating,

i.e. turn the centre rotary switch all the

way to the right (28 °C).

z Switch on heated rear window Ü.

To switch off, press button V again; the

automatic air conditioning system will

operate at the settings selected previously.

9 Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could

lead to misted or icy windows and

accidents stemming from impaired

visibility.

156 Climate control

Electronic climate control

system 3

Provides a the greatest amount of comfort

in the interior regardless of the weather,

outside temperature or season.

To ensure a constant and comfortable

climate in the vehicle, the temperature of

the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the

air distribution are changed automatically

according to climatic conditions outside

the vehicle.

The air is automatically regulated in

accordance with the settings personally

selected for the driver and passenger sides.

Temperature changes due to external

influences, such as direct sunlight, are

automatically compensated.

Data is shown on the information display.

Setting modifications are briefly shown in

the information display, superimposing

over the currently displayed menu.

The display can vary according to the type

of presentation – see page 108.

Climate control system settings are stored

in the vehicle key when the vehicle is

locked, see "Storing custom vehicle settings

in the vehicle key", see page 28.

Different settings are stored for each

remote control. Use of a remote control will

activate the settings associated with it.

Manual settings e.g. operating without

cooling and air distribution, can be

selected using the menu, see page 158.

When cooling (air conditioning

compressor) is active, air is cooled and

dehumidified.

The pollen filter removes dust, soot, pollen

and spores from the inflowing outside air.

The automatic air recirculation system 3

has an air quality sensor 3 to detect

harmful ambient gases, in which case it will

switch automatically to recirculation.

When set to automatic mode, the climate

control system provides the optimal

settings for almost all conditions. If

necessary, climate control system settings

can be modified manually.

The climate control system is only

operational when the engine is running.

Cooling (air conditioning compressor)

switches off automatically at low outside

temperatures.

FM [TP] CDin

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

157Climate control

Automatic mode

Basic setting for maximum comfort:

z Press AUTO button.

z All front air vents open. If desired, the

rear vents also 3.

z Air conditioning compressor activation –

see page 160.

z Individually set temperature for the

driver’s and passenger side to 22 °C

using the outer knobs.

The temperature can be set higher or lower

as desired.

Different temperatures can be set for the

driver and passenger sides.

Switching off the air conditioning

compressor (Eco appears in the display)

can have a detrimental effect on comfort

and safety, see page 160.

All air vents (except the rear air vents 3)

are controlled automatically in automatic

mode. The front air vents should therefore

always be open.

Automatic air recirculation system 3

The ventilation system is set to recirculation

mode and interior air is recirculated.

The automatic air recirculation system has

an air quality sensor to detect harmful

gases in the outside air, in which case it will

switch automatically to recirculation.

At low outside temperatures and with the

cooling (air conditioning compressor)

switched off, automatic recirculation

operation will be disabled. This prevents

the windows from misting up. Switch

manually to air recirculation as necessary.

Activating/deactivating automatic air

recirculation system – see page 161.

Manual recirculation mode – see page 162.

158 Climate control

Temperature preset

Using the outer knobs, temperatures can

be individually set to values between 16 °C

and 28 °C.

For reasons of comfort, temperature can

only be changed in small increments.

Cars with Quickheat

3: Depending on the

outside temperature and engine

temperature, the passenger compartment

can be heated more quickly by means of

supplementary electrical heating.

The auxiliary electric heater switches itself

on automatically.

If a temperature below 16 °C is set,

Lo appears in the display: the climate

control system runs constantly at

maximum cooling power. The temperature

is not regulated.

If a temperature above 28 °C is set,

Hi appears in the display: the climate

control system runs constantly at

maximum heating power. The temperature

is not regulated.

Temperature settings are stored when the

ignition is switched off.

Common temperature setting

Press the knob for the driver’s side. The

temperature both the driver and

passenger side together can be set using

the knob on the driver’s side.

Individual temperature settings

Press the knob for the passenger side.

Temperatures can be set independently of

each other using the knobs for the driver

and passenger sides.

The temperature on both the driver and

passenger side are shown in the display.

For reasons of comfort, the temperatures

cannot differ by more than 2 °C.

Manual settings

Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or

misted windows), the functions of the

climate control system can be modified

manually.

Climate control system settings can be

changed via the centre knob, the buttons

and the menus depicted on the display.

Press the centre knob to call up the menu.

The menu for manual climate control

system settings appears in the display.

FM [TP] CDin

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

Climate

Air distribut.

Autom. blower

Auto. recirc

159Climate control

The individual menu items are marked by

rotating the centre knob and selected by

pressing it. Selecting certain menus by

pressing the knob will open a submenu.

To exit a menu, turn the centre knob left or

right to Return or Main and select.

Manual settings are stored when the

ignition is switched off.

Window demisting and de-icing

Misted or icy windows, such as in damp

weather, from wet clothes or when outside

temperatures are low:

Press button V, control indicator in

button.

Temperature and air distribution settings

are made automatically, the fan runs at a

high speed (fan speed is indicated on the

display) and the windows are quickly

cleared of moisture and ice.

The air flow can be increased or decreased

by turning the central knob.

To return to automatic mode: press

button V or AUTO.

Heated rear window, see page 143.

Auxiliary heating 3, see page 163.

Air distribut.

9 Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could

lead to misted or icy windows and

accidents stemming from impaired

visibility.

FM [TP] CDin

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

160 Climate control

Activating and deactivating air

conditioning compressor

If no cooling or dehumidification is

required, switch the air conditioning

compressor off (maximum energy savings):

Mark menu item AC from the manual

settings menu and select by pressing. Eco

appears on the display.

Inflowing air is neither cooled nor

dehumidified. This restricts the level of

comfort provided by the electronic climate

control system. This may cause the

windows to mist up, for example.

To activate cooling: Select menu item AC

from the manual settings menu and press

to activate cooling.

Air distribution

Select menu item Air distribut. from the

manual settings menu.

Make the desired settings in the Air

distribut. menu:

Return to automatic air distribution:

deactivate relevant setting or press

button AUTO.

Climate

Air distribut.

AC Air conditioning

Autom. blower on / off

 Auto. recirc

Up Air distribution towards

windscreen and front door

windows

Middle Air distribution to vehicle

occupants via adjustable air

vents at front

Down Air distribution towards footwell

Air distribut.

161Climate control

Air flow

Turn the centre rotary knob clockwise or

anticlockwise (if no menu for manual

settings is displayed). The selected fan

level is indicated by x and numbers in the

display.

At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air

conditioning compressor) are switched off.

To return to automatic mode: Press AUTO

button.

Fan control in automatic mode 3

Fan regulation in automatic mode can be

modified.

Select menu item Automatic blower from

the manual settings menu and select the

desired fan control.

Depending on the setting, the maximum

air flow, and thereby the noise level, will

increase.

Switching automatic recirculation 3 on

or off

The automatic air recirculation system has

an air quality sensor to detect harmful

gases in the outside air, in which case it will

switch automatically to recirculation.

Select menu item Auto. recirc from the

manual settings menu and switch it on or

off by pressing.

Switch to manual air recirculation as

necessary.

FM [TP] CDin

ᕃ

90.6

MHz

Automatic blower

Strong

Normal

Weak

Climate

Air distribut.

Autom. blower

Auto. recirc

Automatic

recirculation

air control at

bad outside air

162 Climate control

Manual air recirculation mode

The air recirculation system prevents the

entry of outside air and the air in the

passenger compartment is circulated.

Press button 4, control indicator in

button.

The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air

recirculation mode. The quality of the

passenger compartment air deteriorates

which may cause the vehicle occupants to

feel drowsy. In operation without cooling

the air humidity increases, so the windows

may mist up. Consequently, manual air

recirculation should only be run for short

periods of time.

To deactivate manual air recirculation:

Press button 4 again. The control

indicator in the button goes off.

Air conditioning with the engine not

running

When the vehicle is stopped and the

ignition off, the heat or cooling power still

in the system can be used to condition the

passenger compartment, for example

when stopped at a level crossing.

Press button AUTO with the ignition off.

Residual air conditioning on will appear

briefly in the display.

The air conditioning will operate for a

limited period of time.

If necessary, the auxiliary heating 3 also

automatically switches on. Observe notes

on page 163.

To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO

button.

Residual air conditioning on

163Climate control

Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3

If the engine is switched off, the interior is

heated or ventilated depending on the

values that have been set and the interior

temperature.

The regulation is in accordance with the

most recent temperature settings in the

climate control system – see page 158.

When the system is switched on, the

temperature setting can be varied using

the outer rotary knobs.

The air is directed to the windscreen and

the front side windows if the V button is

pressed before switching the ignition off.

Direct activation

For immediate activation with the ignition

on, select menu item Parking heater and

then menu item On from the manual

settings menu.

When the system is activated, the control

indicator in the button AUTO will

illuminate.

The system switches itself off automatically

after a maximum of 60 minutes depending

on the values that have been set and the

interior temperature.

For early deactivation, press the AUTO

button or select menu item Parking heater

and then menu item On once again.

Climate

Air distribut.

Autom. blower

Auto. recirc

Parking heater

9 Warning

Do not switch auxiliary heater on in filling

stations or closed spaces – risk of fire or

injury.

Parking heater

Start 1

Start 2

Start 3

Setting

164 Climate control

Switching on at a programmed time

Three programmed times can be stored for

switching on.

For safety reasons only one programmed

time for switching on can be active at any

one time. After the heating cycle has been

completed, the next required time for

switching on must be activated afresh.

To store a programmed time for activation,

select menu item Parking heater from the

manual settings menu.

After menu item Parking heater the

current status will be shown.

To set a time, select menu item Setting.

Then select menu item Start 1, Start 2

or Start 3 and set the desired time.

Select the required time for programmed

switching on.

When the system is activated, the control

indicator in the button AUTO will

illuminate.

The system switches itself off automatically

after a maximum of 60 minutes depending

on the values that have been set and the

interior temperature.

To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO

button.

To perform settings, the Parking heater

menu can be called up within 2 hours of

switching the ignition off by pressing on the

central rotary knob.

Parking heater

Start 1

Start 2

Start 3

Setting

Parking heater

Start 1

Start 2

Start 3

Setting

Start 1

Start 2

Start 3

165Climate control

Remote control

The system can also be switched on and off

directly using the remote control:

Whilst the control indicator is illuminated,

no further signal can be sent.

When the system is activated, the control

indicator in the button AUTO will

illuminate.

The remote control has a range of approx.

600 m. The range can be reduced by

obstructions between the sender and

receiver (e.g. walls) and by low power in the

battery.

The system switches itself off automatically

after a maximum of 60 minutes depending

on the values that have been set and the

interior temperature.

The auxiliary heating can be switched off

at any time by pressing the button §.

Deactivating an activated switch-on time:

1. Press button §.

2. Delay of at least 3 seconds.

3. Press button § again.

If required, up to three additional remote

control units can be programmed. We

recommend that you consult your Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer.

Changing the remote control battery

Replace the battery immediately if the

range of the remote control starts to

become reduced.

Insert a pointed object into the opening in

the underside of the remote control and flip

open the cover. Replace batteries

observing installation position. For battery

type – see page 293.

Always exchange all batteries at the same

time.

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries

in accordance with environmental

protection regulations.

On = Press button

b, the control

indicator in the remote control

will illuminate

Off = Press button §, the control

indicator in the remote control

will illuminate

166 Climate control

Air intake

The air intakes in front of the windscreen on

the far right and left sides of the engine

compartment must be kept clear to allow

air intake. Remove any leaves, dirt or snow.

Air outlet

Do not cover the air outlets when storing

items in the luggage compartment storage

compartments.

Pollen filter

The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen

and spores from the air entering from

outside. The active carbon layer 3

eliminates most odours and harmful

ambient gases from the air.

Have the pollen filter replaced by a

workshop at the replacement intervals

specified in the service booklet.

Note

If the windscreen is misted due to damp

weather, temporarily set the system as

described under "Window demisting and

defrosting", see pages 147, 150, 159.

The cooling system 3 operates most

effectively with the windows and sun roof 3

closed. If the passenger compartment has

heated up considerably after a long period

in direct sunlight, briefly open the windows

and sun roof 3 so that the hot air can

escape quickly.

167Climate control

When cooling 3 (air conditioning

compressor) is switched on condensation

forms, which is expelled from the underside

of the vehicle.

At least one air vent must be open while

cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is

on in order to prevent the evaporator from

icing up due to lack of air movement.

Cooling switches off automatically at low

outside temperatures.

When the auxiliary heating/auxiliary

ventilation 3 is switched on the Vauxhall

alarm system monitoring of the vehicle

interior 3 is deactivated.

Auxiliary heating 3 consumes fuel (approx.

0.3 litres per heating process on average).

When the auxiliary heating 3 is switched

on there may briefly be some smoke and

noise.

The auxiliary heating 3 only switches itself

on at outside temperatures of less than

approx. 20 °C and at coolant temperatures

of less than approx. 80 °C.

In order to improve heating power and

ensure that the engine operating

temperature is reached quickly, auxiliary

heating 3 also switches on automatically

when driving if the outside temperature is

less than approx. 8 °C. This occurs

irrespective of stored auxiliary heating

switch-on times. Auxiliary heating switches

itself off automatically when the engine is

switched off, while the combustion air fan

continues running for approx. 2 minutes

(humming noise).

Maintenance

In order to ensure consistently good

operation, the air conditioning

compressor 3 must be switched on for

several minutes once per month

irrespective of the weather or time of year.

If the vehicle has an electronic climate

control system, this is done automatically

during travel. Operation with cooling (air

conditioning compressor) is not possible

when outside temperatures are low. Every

6 months, the auxiliary heating 3 should be

operated for a few minutes at a preset

temperature above 22 °C.

On faults, contact a workshop.

168 Driving and operation

Driving and operation

Easytronic 3

The automatic Easytronic transmission

permits manual (manual mode) or

automatic gear shifting (automatic mode),

both with automatic clutch control.

Transmission display

Shows the mode or current gear.

Easytronic 3 ......................................... 168

Automatic transmission 3 .................. 176

Driving hints ......................................... 184

Saving fuel, protecting the

environment ...................................... 186

Fuels, refuelling.................................... 188

Catalytic converter, exhaust gases.... 190

Drive Control Systems ......................... 196

Brake system........................................ 208

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS u) .... 210

Wheels, tyres........................................ 211

Roof racks 3......................................... 218

Towing equipment 3........................... 219

Towing equipment with removable

coupling ball bar 3 ........................... 219

Caravan/trailer towing ........................ 222

9 Warning

Disregard of these instructions may lead

to injuries or endanger life.

169Driving and operation

Starting the engine

Operate foot brake when starting the

engine. The engine can only be started

with the foot brake operated. "N" appears

in the transmission display. If the

foot brake is not operated the control

indicator

j illuminates on the instrument

panel, and "N" flashes in the transmission

display - the engine cannot be started.

Also the vehicle cannot be started if all

brake lights have failed.

It is not necessary to select the neutral

position before starting. If no gear is

engaged, the transmission automatically

shifts into neutral position (N) before

starting the engine. This can lead to a

slight delay when starting.

Easytronic operation via the selector lever

Always move the selector lever in the

appropriate direction as far as it will go.

Upon release, it automatically returns to

the centre position. Pay heed to the

gear/mode indicator in the transmission

display.

Move selector lever toward N

Neutral.

170 Driving and operation

Starting off

Depress the foot brake, release the hand

brake, move the selector lever to A,

+ or -.

Easytronic is in automatic mode and first

gear is engaged (second gear if the Winter

program is active). "A" appears in the

transmission display.

The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot

brake is released.

It is also possible to start off without

depressing the foot brake if the accelerator

pedal is operated directly after moving the

selector lever. If there is no immediate

acceleration or the foot brake is not

depressed, no gear is engaged and "A"

flashes. After a few seconds, the display

reverts to "N". Repeat previously described

starting procedure.

In Automatic mode, selection of other

gears is automatic irrespective of driving

conditions.

Move selector lever toward A

Switch between Automatic and Manual

mode.

Manual gear shifting is possible in manual

mode. The currently engaged gear

appears in the display.

If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic

will automatically shift to a lower gear even

in Manual mode. This prevents the engine

from stalling.

Move selector lever toward + or -

If a higher gear is selected when the

running speed is too low, or a lower gear

when the speed is too high, no shift is

effected. This prevents the engine from

running at too low or too high revs.

Gears can be skipped by moving the

selector lever repeatedly at short intervals.

Shift to a higher gear

Shift to a lower gear

171Driving and operation

If the vehicle is in automatic mode, on

movement of the selector lever to

+ or -

Easytronic shifts to manual mode and

changes up or down. The transmission

display shows the currently selected gear.

Move selector lever toward R

Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is

stationary.

Depress the foot brake, release the hand

brake and move the selector lever to R.

Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appears in

the transmission display.

The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot

brake is released.

It is also possible to start off in reverse

without depressing the foot brake if the

accelerator pedal is operated directly after

moving the selector lever. If there is no

immediate acceleration or the foot brake is

not depressed, no gear is engaged and "R"

flashes. After a few seconds, the display

reverts to "N". Repeat previously described

starting procedure.

Electronically controlled driving programs

z By means of delayed gear changing

(higher engine speeds) following a cold

start, the operating temperature

program in automatic mode quickly and

automatically brings the catalytic

converter to the temperature required

for optimum pollutant reduction.

z Adaptive programs automatically adapt

gear shifting in automatic mode to suit

the driving conditions, such as if the

vehicle is towing a caravan/trailer, has a

high payload, or is being driven on

inclines.

z Winter program: Press button T – see

next page.

172 Driving and operation

Winter program T

In the event of difficulties starting off

on slippery roads, press button T

("A" and T appear in the transmission

display). Easytronic switches to automatic

mode and the vehicle sets off in second

gear.

The winter program is switched off by:

z pressing button T again,

z turning off the ignition.

In order to protect the Easytronic the winter

program automatically switches itself off

at extremely high clutch temperatures.

If the vehicle is switched to manual mode

while the winter program is active, the

winter programme is interrupted. The

winter programme resumes upon return to

automatic mode.

Kickdown

Accelerator pedal pressed past the

pressure point: below certain speeds, the

transmission shifts down into a lower gear.

Full engine power is available for

acceleration.

During kickdown no manual gear shifting is

possible.

173Driving and operation

When the engine speed approaches its

upper limit, the transmission shifts to a

higher gear during kickdown even in

Manual mode.

Without kickdown this automatic shift is

not effected in Manual mode.

Engine braking

Automatic mode:

When driving downhill, Easytronic does not

shift into higher gears until a fairly high

engine speed has been reached. When

braking, Easytronic shifts down in good

time.

Manual mode:

To utilise the engine braking effect, select a

lower gear in good time when driving

downhill.

"Rocking" the car

If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle

to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,

move the selector lever between R and A

(or + or -) in a repeat pattern while applying

light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do

not race the engine and avoid sudden

acceleration.

This applies only to the exceptional

circumstances mentioned above.

Manoeuvring the vehicle

To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth

during attempts to park or in garage

entrances the creeping movement can be

utilised by releasing the foot brake.

Never actuate accelerator and brake

pedals simultaneously.

To prevent damage, Easytronic

disengages the "creep function" at

extremely high automatic clutch

temperatures.

174 Driving and operation

Stopping the vehicle

In Automatic or Manual mode, when the

vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter

mode engaged, second gear) is engaged

automatically and the clutch released.

In R reverse remains engaged.

When the engine is running, a gear is

engaged and the foot brake is not

depressed, a warning buzzer sounds when

the driver’s door is opened and the gear

shown in the transmission display flashes

at a rapid rate. If the hand brake is not

engaged, the vehicle creeps. Move the

selector lever to N and apply the hand

brake.

When stopping on gradients, engage the

hand brake or depress the brake pedal. To

prevent overheating of the clutch, do not

increase engine speed to ensure smooth

idling when in gear.

In order to prevent damage to the

Easytronic the clutch is automatically

engaged at extremely high clutch

temperatures.

Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy

period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level

crossings.

Vehicle storage

Before leaving the vehicle:

z engage hand brake,

z remove ignition key.

The most recently engaged gear (indicator

in transmission display) remains engaged.

With N, no gear is engaged.

When the ignition is switched off the

Easytronic no longer responds to

movement of the selector lever.

Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery

may become discharged if the vehicle is

parked for long periods.

If the hand brake has not been applied, the

control indicator R flashes for a few

seconds after the ignition is switched off.

With the engine off and the hand brake not

applied, when the driver’s door is opened a

warning buzzer sounds and the control

indicator R flashes; switch on ignition,

engage gear, switch off ignition and apply

hand brake.

Fault

Control indicator A illuminates in the

event of a fault in the Easytronic system. In

the event of serious faults, "F" also appears

in the transmission display.

It is possible to continue driving if only

control indicator A illuminates. Manual

mode can then no longer be selected.

If "F" also appears in the transmission

display, continued driving is not possible.

Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a

workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated

into the system allows rapid fault

identification.

175Driving and operation

Interruption of power supply

The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle

battery is discharged and a gear has been

selected. The vehicle cannot move.

If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using

jump leads – see page 228.

If the cause of the power failure is not a

discharged battery, contact a workshop. If

the vehicle must be removed from flowing

traffic, release the clutch as follows:

1. Apply hand brake and switch off

ignition.

2. Opening and propping up the bonnet –

see page 226.

3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see

figure) so that no dirt can get into the

opening when the cap is removed.

4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by

lifting upwards – see figure.

5. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise using

a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3 –

see page 235) until clear resistance can

be felt. The clutch has now been

disengaged.

Do not turn beyond the resistance, since

this can damage the Easytronic.

6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must be

in full contact with the housing.

Towing the vehicle and starting the engine

is not permitted when the clutch has been

released in this way, although the vehicle

can be moved a short distance.

Contact a workshop immediately.

176 Driving and operation

Automatic transmission 3

The automatic transmission allows

automatic shifting (Automatic mode) or

manual shifting (Manual mode) to take

place.

The engine can only be started with the

selector lever in P or N. When starting in N,

depress the foot brake or apply the hand

brake. After the engine has started,

depress the brake before engaging a gear.

Do not accelerate while selecting a gear.

Once a gear is engaged and the brake is

released, the vehicle "creeps". Never

depress the brake pedal and the

accelerator pedal simultaneously. The

selected gear is shown in the transmission

display, see page 176.

Selecting D puts the transmission in

automatic mode.

If the selector lever is moved to the left from

the D position, manual mode is activated.

Gearchanges can then be made manually

by tipping the selector lever toward + or -.

Transmission display

Display of selector lever setting, gear and

mode.

9 Warning

Disregard of these instructions may lead

to injuries or endanger life.

P Park position

R Reverse gear

N Neutral

D Automatic mode

1-6 Manual mode showing the gear

selected

177Driving and operation

Selector lever settings P, R, N and D

(automatic mode)

The selector lever can only be moved out of

position P or N with the ignition switched on

and the foot brake applied (selector lever

lock). In selector lever position N the

selector lever lock is activated after a delay

and only if the vehicle is stationary.

In positions P or N, the control indicator

lights up red in the selector lever indicator,

the selector lever is blocked,

see Fig. S 12547.

To engage P or R, push button on selector

lever.

The engine can only be started with lever in

position P or N. When position N is selected,

press foot brake or engage hand brake

before starting.

Do not accelerate during the selection

procedure.

If the transmission fluid temperature is

less than -25 °C, the selector lever cannot

be moved until the fluid temperature

reaches -25 °C with the engine running

(P or N flashes in the transmission display

for as long as the selector lever is locked).

P Park position, front wheels blocked.

Only select with vehicle stationary

and hand brake applied. "P" appears

in the transmission display.

R Reverse gear. Only select when

vehicle is stationary. "R" appears in

the transmission display.

N Neutral or idling position.

"N" appears in the transmission

display.

D Drive position for normal driving

in 1st to highest gear. "D" appears in

the transmission display.

178 Driving and operation

ActiveSelect (manual mode)

Shift the selector lever from D first to the left

and then forward or rearward.

If a higher gear is selected at too low a

speed or a lower gear selected at too high

a speed, there is no change. This avoids

revs that are too low or too high.

If the engine speed is too slow, the

transmission automatically shifts to a lower

gear, but not if the gear was selected

below a certain speed.

If a higher gear is selected below a certain

speed a downshift does not take place.

When engine speed is high, there is no

automatic shift to a higher gear.

For reasons of safety, kickdown also

functions in manual mode – see page 180.

The selected gear is shown in the

transmission display – see page 176.

Electronically controlled driving programs

z With adaptive programs, shifting into

other gears is handled automatically

based on the driving style, e.g.:

Shift to a higher gear

Shift to a lower gear

– Economical driving style: at slower

engine speeds.

– Adaptation to special driving

conditions still takes place, such as:

driving up and down hills, towing a

caravan or trailer, and with a heavy

load.

179Driving and operation

z Automatic neutral shift function

automatically sets the transmission to N

to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at

traffic lights.

The automatic neutral shift function is

activated when the following occurs

simultaneously:

As soon as the brake is released and the

accelerator pedal is depressed, the

vehicle starts off in the usual manner.

z After a cold start, the operating

temperature program ensures that the

correct gear (increased engine speed) is

selected to quickly bring the catalytic

converter to the temperature required

for optimum pollutant reduction.

z If the Continuous Damping Control is set

to SPORT mode 3, the shift times are

reduced and gear changes occur at

higher engine speeds (not when cruise

control is active). The control indicator 1

also illuminates in the transmission

display, see page 176.

Continuous Damping Control, SPORT

mode 3 – see page 198.

z Winter program: Press button T. Control

indicator T appears in the transmission

display – see next page.

– The selector lever is in Automatic or

Manual mode.

– The foot brake is depressed.

– The vehicle is stationary.

– The accelerator pedal is not

actuated.

– The transmission oil temperature is

above 0 °C.

180 Driving and operation

Winter program T

Press button T if you are having problems

starting off on a slippery road surface.

To activate

The winter program can be switched in

Automatic mode (T illuminates in the

transmission display, see page 176). The

vehicle shifts to 4th gear.

To deactivate

The winter program is switched off by:

z pressing button T again,

z switching off the ignition,

z switching to Manual mode.

To protect against damage, the starting-

off aid automatically cuts out at very high

transmission oil temperatures.

Kickdown

Depress accelerator past resistance point:

transmission shifts to a lower gear

depending on engine speed. Full engine

power is available for acceleration.

For safety reasons, kickdown is available in

both automatic mode and manual mode.

181Driving and operation

Engine braking

The automatic transmission automatically

selects the driving program with optimal

engine braking effect.

As needed, lower gears can also be

selected in manual mode to increase

engine braking effect. 1st gear has the

greatest braking effect.

"Rocking" the car

If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle

to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,

move the selector lever from D to R in a

repeat pattern while simultaneously

applying light pressure to the accelerator

pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid

sudden acceleration.

This applies only to the exceptional

circumstances mentioned above.

Manoeuvring the vehicle

To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth

during attempts to park or in garage

entrances, the vehicle’s creeping

movement can be utilised by releasing the

brake pedal.

Never actuate accelerator and brake

pedals simultaneously.

182 Driving and operation

Stopping the vehicle

The selector lever can be left in the chosen

gear with the engine running.

When stopping on gradients engage hand

brake or depress brake pedal. To prevent

overheating of the transmission, do not

increase engine revolutions to ensure

smooth idling while standing if a gear has

been selected.

Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy

period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level

crossings.

Before leaving the vehicle, apply hand

brake, then place selector lever in

position P and remove ignition key.

The ignition key can only be removed when

the selector lever is in position P.

If the selector lever is not in the P position

when the ignition is switched off, control

indicator

j in the selector lever indicator

strip flashes – see page 177, Fig. S 12547.

Shift the selector lever to P.

If the ignition key is not removed, the

battery may be discharged if the vehicle is

then left to stand for a lengthy period of

time.

Fault

In the event of a fault in the automatic

transmission, control indicator A

illuminates. The transmission no longer

shifts automatically. Driving can be

continued.

In manual mode, 2nd gear and the highest

gear can be engaged. For some faults, only

the highest gear is available.

Only the highest gear is available in D in

automatic mode.

183Driving and operation

Illumination of control indicator A can

also indicate a fault in the engine

electronics – see page 192.

For diesel engines

Z19DTL, Z19DT,

Z 19 DTH illumination of control

indicator A could also indicate that the

diesel fuel filter must be drained of water,

see page 270.

Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a

workshop.

Interruption of power supply

If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector

lever cannot be moved out of position P

or N.

If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using

jump leads – see page 228.

If the cause is not a discharged battery,

unlock selector lever:

1. Apply hand brake.

2. Remove the ashtray – see page 95.

3. Pull out ashtray socket upwards.

4. Push the yellow catch downwards with a

screwdriver and move the selector lever

out of P.

5. Refit ashtray socket in centre console

and latch into position.

6. Refit ashtray.

Selecting P or N again effects locking

again. Have the cause of the interruption

of power supply rectified by a workshop.

Sales designation – see page 280.

184 Driving and operation

Driving hints

The first 600 miles / 1000 km

Drive your vehicle at various speeds. Do

not use full throttle. Never allow the engine

to labour at low revs.

Make good use of all gears. Depress the

accelerator pedal a maximum of around

three quarters of the available pedal travel

in all gears.

Do not drive faster than three quarters of

maximum speed.

Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the

first 120 miles (200 km).

Never coast with engine not running

Many units will not function in this situation

(e.g. brake servo unit, electro-hydraulic

power steering). Driving in this manner is a

danger to yourself and others.

Brake servo unit

When the engine is not running, the brake

servo unit is no longer effective once the

brake pedal has been depressed once or

twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but

significantly greater force is required for

braking.

Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering

If the power-assisted steering fails when

being towed with the engine switched off,

the vehicle can still be steered, but

considerably more force is required.

Driving in mountainous terrain or with a

trailer/caravan

The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its

cooling power is therefore independent of

the engine speed.

Since a considerable amount of heat is

generated at high engine speeds and less

at slower speeds, do not shift down when

climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping

with the gradient in the higher gear.

Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10%

or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph

(30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 km/h)

in 2nd gear; with automatic transmission

3, do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in

position 1.

Driving with a roof load

Do not exceed the permissible roof load –

see pages 218, 285. For reasons of safety,

distribute the load evenly and secure it

properly with retaining straps. Adjust the

tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not

drive faster than 80 mph (120 km/h). Check

and retighten the straps frequently.

Observe country-specific regulations.

Switching off the engine

When you switch off, fans in the engine

compartment may continue running for a

time to cool the engine.

If the engine temperature is very high, e.g.

after driving in mountainous terrain: allow

the engine to idle for approximately two

minutes in order to prevent heat

accumulation.

Vehicles with turbocharged engine

After running at high engine speeds or high

engine loads, operate the engine briefly

at a low load or run in neutral for approx.

30 seconds before switching off in order

to protect the turbocharger.

Save energy – more miles

Please observe the running-in hints on the

previous page and the tips for energy

saving on the following pages.

Good, technically correct and economical

driving ensures maximum durability and

performance for your vehicle.

185Driving and operation

Overrun

The fuel supply is automatically shut off

during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is

being driven down long gradients or when

braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to

take effect, do not accelerate during

overrun and, if in manual transmission

mode, do not de-clutch. To prevent

damage to the catalytic converter, overrun

cut-off is temporarily deactivated when the

catalytic converter temperature is high.

Vehicles with turbocharged engine

Flow-generated noises may be audible if

the accelerator is released quickly on

account of air flow in the turbocharger.

Engine speed

Drive in a low engine speed range for each

gear as much as possible.

Warming up

Allow the engine to warm up while driving.

Do not warm it up by letting it run at idling

speed. Do not apply full throttle until the

engine has reached operating

temperature.

After a cold start, the automatic

transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in

automatic mode shifts into higher gears at

higher rpm. This allows the catalytic

converter to quickly reach the temperature

required for optimum pollutant reduction.

Correct gear selection

Engine in neutral and without revving in the

lower gears. Stop-and-go traffic and

driving at a speed too high for the selected

gear or transmission ratio increases wear

and fuel consumption.

Change down

When decreasing speed, shift down into

the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch

with a high-revving engine. This is

especially important when hill climbing.

Clutch operation

Always depress the clutch pedal hard to

the floor to prevent shifting difficulties and

transmission damage.

When driving do not use the pedal as a

foot rest; this will cause substantial clutch

wear.

Cooling fan

The cooling fan is controlled via a

thermoswitch and therefore only runs if

necessary.

The cooling fan automatically switches on

when the diesel particle filter is being

cleaned 3 depending on the engine.

Pedals

Do not place any objects in the foot well

which could slip under the pedals and

inhibit the pedal travel.

To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited,

there must be no mats in the area of the

pedals.

Battery care

When driving slowly or when the vehicle is

stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic, stop-

and-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all

unnecessary electrical loads where

possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated

seats).

De-clutch when starting in order to relieve

the strain on the starter and the battery.

186 Driving and operation

Saving fuel, protecting the

environment

Trend-setting technology

In the development and manufacture of

your vehicle, environment-friendly and in

the main recyclable materials were used.

The production methods used to make

your vehicle are likewise environmentally-

compatible.

Recycling of production wastes keeps the

circulation of material closed. Reduction of

energy and water requirements also helps

to conserve natural resources.

A highly advanced design means that your

vehicle can be easily disassembled at the

end of its working life, and the individual

materials separated for subsequent re-use.

Materials such as asbestos and cadmium

are not used. The refrigerant in the air

conditioning system 3 is CFC-free.

New painting techniques employ water as

a solvent.

End-of-life vehicle recovery

For detailed information on Vauxhall’s

ongoing commitment to achieving an

environmentally sustainable future,

including; design for recycling, take back of

End-of-Life Vehicles (ELVs) and the

recycling of ELVs view

www.vauxhall.co.uk/recycling for details.

Energy and environment-conscious

driving

z High noise levels and exhaust emissions

are often a result of driving without due

attention to saving energy and

protecting the environment.

z You should therefore drive with energy in

mind "more miles – less fuel".

Reduce the noise level and exhaust

emissions by adopting an environment-

conscious driving style. This is extremely

worthwhile and improves the quality of

life.

Fuel consumption depends to a great

extent on your own personal driving

style. The following hints are intended to

help you consume fuel at a rate that is as

close as possible to the specified levels –

see page 283.

Check your vehicle’s fuel consumption

every time you refuel. This facilitates

early detection of any irregularities

causing increased fuel consumption.

Warming up

z Full throttle and warming up at idle

speed increase wear, fuel consumption,

exhaust emission, the amount of

pollutant in the exhaust and the amount

of noise.

z Drive off as soon as possible after

starting.

Uniform speed

z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel

consumption, the exhaust emissions, the

proportion of pollutant in the exhaust

gas and the noise level.

z Do not accelerate and brake

unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed,

watching the road.

Avoid frequent starting off and stopping

e.g. at traffic lights, in short distance

traffic and in queues of traffic by means

of clever planning. Select roads with

good traffic flow.

Idling

z The engine also consumes fuel when

idling.

z If you have to wait for more than one

minute, it is worthwhile switching off the

engine. Five minutes of idling

corresponds to approximately one

kilometre of driving.

187Driving and operation

Overrun

z The fuel supply is automatically shut off

during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is

being driven down long gradients or

when braking – see page 185.

z To enable the overrun cut-off to come

into action and save fuel, do not

accelerate or de-clutch during overrun.

Correct gear selection

z High revs increase engine wear and fuel

consumption.

z Do not race your engine. Avoid driving at

high engine speeds.

Making use of the tachometer helps to

save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed

range for each gear as much as possible

with uniform engine speeds. Drive as

often as possible in top gear, select the

next higher gear as soon as possible,

and only change down when the engine

is no longer running perfectly smoothly.

High speed

z The higher the speed, the higher the

consumption and the noise level. At top

speed, you consume a great deal of fuel

and produce excessive noise and

exhaust emissions.

z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal

results in distinct fuel savings with no

major loss of speed.

Drive at no more than around three

quarters of maximum speed and you will

use up to 50 % less fuel, without losing a

great deal of time.

Tyre pressure

z Inadequate tyre pressure, leading to

higher road resistance, costs money in

two ways: for more fuel and increased

tyre wear.

z Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off.

Electrical loads

z The power consumption of electrical

equipment increases fuel consumption.

z Switch off all auxiliary electrical loads

(e.g. air conditioning 3, heated rear

window) when not needed.

Roof racks, ski-holders

z Due to air resistance, a roof load

can increase fuel consumption by

approx. 3.5 gal /h (1 l/100 km).

z Remove them if they are not being used.

Repair and maintenance

z Improper repairs or adjustment and

maintenance work can increase fuel

consumption. Do not carry out work on

the engine yourself.

You may out of ignorance infringe

environmental laws by not disposing of

materials properly.

Appropriate parts might not be recycled.

Contact with some of the materials

involved may pose a health hazard.

z We recommend that repair and

maintenance be entrusted to your

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Extreme driving conditions

z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving

on poor roads and winter driving all

increase fuel consumption.

Fuel consumption increases dramatically

in urban traffic and at winter

temperatures, especially on short trips

when the engine operating temperature

is not reached.

z Follow the hints given above to keep

consumption to a minimum under such

conditions.

188 Driving and operation

Fuels, refuelling

Fuel consumption

Fuel consumption is determined under

specific driving conditions – see page 283.

Special equipment increases the weight of

the vehicle. As a result, they can increase

fuel consumption and reduce the specified

maximum speed.

For the first few thousand miles, friction

between the engine and transmission

components is higher. This increases fuel

consumption.

Fuel for petrol engines

Normal commercial high-quality fuels with

a maximum ethanol content of 5% in

accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable

(for catalytic converter see page 190, for

octane numbers see pages 280, 281). The

quality thereof has considerable effect on

the performance, running and service life

of the engine. The additives mixed with the

fuel are extremely important. For this

reason you must only refuel with high-

quality fuels containing additives.

Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5%

do not comply with DIN EN 228 and must

not be used unless the vehicle has been

specifically developed and approved for

these fuels.

Fuel with too low an octane number can

cause pinking. Vuaxhall cannot be held

liable for resulting damage.

Petrol with a higher octane number can

always be used.

The use of 91 octane fuel is not permitted

in vehicles with engine Z 22 YH

The ignition timing adjusts automatically

to the grade of fuel used (octane

number) – see pages 280, 281.

Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95

will ensure economical driving.

Fuel for diesel engines

Diesel engines must be operated only on

commercially available diesel fuel meeting

the specifications of DIN EN 590. Do not

use marine diesel oils, heating oils or

entirely or partially plant-based diesel

fuels, such as rape seed oil or bio diesel,

Aquazole and similar diesel-water

emulsions.

The flow and filterability of diesel fuel are

temperature-dependent.

Diesel fuels with improved low-

temperature properties are therefore

available on the market during the winter

months. Make sure that you fill the tank

with winter fuel before the start of the cold

weather season.

Additives can be used with diesel fuels with

winter properties that are guaranteed by

the manufacturer and when using diesel

fuel filters that are heated depending on

the outside temperature.

Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels

that are intended for petrol engines.

Fuel filler cap

When replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure

to use a genuine fuel filler cap for your

model to ensure full functionality. Diesel-

engined vehicles have special fuel filler

caps.

Sales designation – see page 280.

189Driving and operation

Refuelling

The tank display updates more quickly if

the ignition is switched off during

refuelling.

Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle.

The tank flap is locked together with the

doors – see page 30.

Open the tank flap.

Unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and

suspend from the tank flap.

The fuel tank has a limiting system which

prevents overfilling of the tank.

Correct filling depends to a large extent on

proper operation of the fuel dispensing

pump:

1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch it

on.

2. After an automatic shut-off the nominal

capacity of the fuel tank is reached by

means of two metered top-ups. Insert

fuel dispensing pump as far as it will go.

To close, position the fuel filler cap and

rotate past the resistance until the cap

audibly clicks over the retainer.

Close fuel tank cover.

Wipe off any overflowing fuel immediately.

9 Warning

Care must be taken when handling fuel.

Before refuelling, turn off engine and also

shut off external heaters with combustion

chambers (identified by stickers on fuel

filler cap). Switch off mobile phones.

9 Warning

Fuel is flammable and explosive. When

handling fuel or in the immediate vicinity,

avoid naked flames or sparks. Do not

smoke. This also applies where the

presence of fuel is revealed by its

characteristic smell. If fuel odours occur in

the car, have a workshop eliminate the

fault immediately.

190 Driving and operation

Catalytic converter, exhaust

gases

Catalytic converter for petrol engines

Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic

converter and parts of the electronic

system, rendering them inoperative.

Use of high-quality fuels other than those

specified on page 188 (e.g. LRP

) could

damage the catalytic converter.

On vehicles with a catalytic converter, the

fuel tank filler neck is of a narrow design so

that a dispensing pump for leaded fuel

cannot be inserted.

Damage to the catalytic converter or the

vehicle may result if the following points

are not observed:

z On ignition faults, uneven running after

cold start, a clear drop-off in engine

power or other unusual operating

symptoms which could indicate a fault in

the ignition system, contact a workshop

immediately. Continue driving if

necessary for a short time at low speed

and low revs.

Irregular engine running and a loss of

engine power when the Electronic

Stability Program (ESP®

Plus

3) comes

into action are the result of operating

conditions and are therefore of no

significance – see page 196.

z If unburned fuel enters the catalytic

converter, this may result in overheating

and irreparable damage to the catalytic

converter.

You should therefore avoid

unnecessarily long use of the starter

when starting off, running the tank dry

(an irregular fuel supply will lead to

overheating) and starting the engine by

pushing or towing.

LRP = Lead Replacement Petrol.

191Driving and operation

z If the control indicator Z for exhaust

gases flashes, slow down until the

flashing stops and the control indicator

illuminates. Contact a workshop for

assistance immediately. Control

indicator Z for exhaust gases – see

page 192.

Catalytic converter for diesel engines

Damage to the catalytic converter or the

vehicle may result if the following points

are not observed:

z On uneven running, a clear drop-off in

engine power or other unusual operating

symptoms, contact a workshop

immediately. Continue driving if

necessary for a short time at low speed

and low revs.

Irregular engine running and a loss of

engine power when the Electronic

Stability Program (ESP®

Plus

3) comes

into action are the result of operating

conditions and are therefore of no

significance – see page 196.

Controlling exhaust emission

Some of the damaging substances in

the exhaust such as carbon monoxide (CO),

hydrocarbons (HC) and nitrous

oxides (NO

) are reduced to a minimum

by making structural changes – mainly in

the injection system and the ignition system

in conjunction with the catalytic converter.

192 Driving and operation

Control indicator Z for exhaust

Illuminates when the ignition is switched on

and during the start attempt. Goes off

shortly after the engine starts running.

Illuminated with the engine running

indicates a fault in the exhaust gas

cleaning system. The permitted emissions

may be exceeded. Contact a workshop

immediately.

Flashing with the engine running indicates

a fault which could lead to catalytic

converter damage. You may continue

driving without damage if you back off

until flashing stops and the control

indicator comes on. Contact a workshop

immediately.

Control indicator

A for engine electronics

Illuminates for a few seconds after the

ignition is switched on.

If it illuminates when the engine is running,

there is a fault in engine or transmission

electronics. The electronic system switches

to an emergency running program. Fuel

consumption may be increased and the

driveability of the vehicle may be impaired.

193Driving and operation

In some cases, faults can be eliminated by

switching off the engine and restarting. If

the control light comes on again when the

engine is running, contact a workshop to

eliminate the cause of the fault.

If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it

is of no significance.

If A illuminates, this may also mean water

in the diesel fuel filter in the engines

Z19DTL, Z19DT and Z19DTH. Where

necessary, have the fuel filter inspected by

a workshop for any residual water.

If it flashes after the ignition is switched

on, there is a fault in the immobiliser

system. The engine cannot be started.

See page 27.

Exhaust gases

During the first drive smoke may develop

because of wax and oil evaporating on the

exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the

open for a while after the first drive and

avoid inhaling the fumes.

Sales designation – see page 281

9 Warning

Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous

carbon monoxide, which is colourless and

odourless and could be fatal if inhaled.

If exhaust gases penetrate the vehicle

interior, open a window and contact a

workshop.

Avoid driving with an open luggage

compartment. Otherwise, exhaust gases

could penetrate the interior.

194 Driving and operation

Diesel particle filter 3

The diesel particle filter system removes

polluting soot particles out of the engine

exhaust gases. The system includes a self-

cleaning function that operates

automatically while driving. The filter is

cleaned by burning the trapped soot

particles at a high temperature. There may

be an increase in fuel consumption,

exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan

operation 3 during the self-cleaning

operation.

The self-cleaning function can not operate

automatically during certain driving

situations where the engine does not reach

its normal operating temperature. An

example of this would be driving only short

distances in cold weather. If the filter needs

cleaning and recent driving situations did

not allow the function to automatically

operate, then the control indicator

! will

flash. If this occurs, then you may continue

to drive the vehicle normally. The vehicle

will not be damaged and does not require

service.

The self-cleaning function will

automatically operate while driving after

the engine has reached its normal

operating temperature. The control

indicator

! will continue to flash until the

self-cleaning operation is complete. This

may take up to 20 minutes of driving. The

time will be shorter at higher vehicle

speeds. If the vehicle is not moving for

more than a few minutes, then the self-

cleaning function will not operate.

Operation will continue when driving

resumes.

195Driving and operation

We recommend that you do not turn the

ignition off until the self-cleaning operation

is complete. If you must turn the ignition off

before the operation is complete, then the

operation will automatically resume when

driving the next time and after the engine

has reached its normal operating

temperature.

The control indicator

! goes off as soon as

the self-cleaning operation is complete.

Maintenance

Have all maintenance work carried out at

the intervals specified. We recommend

that you entrust this work to your Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer, who has proper

equipment and trained personnel

available. Electronic testing systems permit

rapid diagnosis and remedy of faults. This

way you can be certain that all

components of the vehicle’s electrical,

injection and ignition systems operate

correctly, that your vehicle has a low level

of pollutant emission and that the catalytic

converter system will have a long service

life.

You are thereby making an important

contribution towards keeping the air clean

and compliance with emissions legislation.

Checking and adjustment of the fuel-

injection and ignition systems is part of the

scope of inspection. For this reason you

should have all maintenance work carried

out at the intervals specified in your Service

Booklet.

196 Driving and operation

Drive Control Systems

Interactive Driving System (IDS+) 3

The IDS+ combines the sensors and control

units of the Electronic Stability Program

(ESP®

Plus

), the Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) and Continuous Damping

Control (CDC). This provides both excellent

driving dynamics and greater safety.

Electronic Stability Program (ESP®

Plus

) 3

ESP®

Plus

improves driving stability when

necessary in any driving situation

regardless of the type of road surface or

tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels

from spinning.

The system monitors vehicle movements.

As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve

(understeers/oversteers) engine output is

reduced (the sound of the engine changes)

and individual wheels are specifically

braked. This considerably improves the

driving stability of the vehicle on snow and

ice and on wet or slippery road surfaces.

197Driving and operation

ESP®

Plus

is ready for operation as soon as

the ignition is switched on and control

indicator v goes out.

Control indicator v flashes when ESP®

Plus

is in action.

The vehicle is now in a critical situation;

ESP®

Plus

allows you to keep control of the

vehicle and reminds you to match your

speed to the road conditions.

Control indicator

Illuminates for a few seconds when the

ignition is switched on. The system is now

ready for operation.

Flashing during driving:

This shows the system has come into

action. The engine output may be reduced

(the sound of the engine changes) and the

vehicle may be braked automatically to a

small degree.

Illuminates while driving:

The system is switched off or a fault has

occurred. The vehicle can continue to be

driven. However, driving stability may

worsen depending on the nature of the

road surface.

Switch on ESP®

Plus

again, or have the

cause of the fault rectified by a workshop.

The system’s integrated self-diagnostics

allows faults to be quickly remedied.

9 Warning

Do not let this special safety feature

tempt you into taking risks when driving.

Traffic safety can only be achieved by

adopting a responsible driving style.

198 Driving and operation

Continuous Damping Control 3 (CDC)

Normal mode

CDC automatically adapts vehicle

damping to the current driving situation

and road conditions.

The system continually monitors wheel and

vehicle movements and immediately

modifies the damping of each shock

absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally

adapted to the driving situation and road

conditions.

Continuous Damping Control is always in

normal mode with the ignition is switched

on. If desired, the system can be switched

to SPORT mode.

In SPORT mode, the damping control is

adapted to a sportier driving style, among

other things. This adaptation results in a

"harder" suspension setting.

SPORT mode - see next column.

SPORT mode

When driving in SPORT mode, the

damping, steering 3 (not for engines

Z 28 NEL/NET)

, throttle application and -

for automatic transmissions 3 - the shifting

points are changed.

Damping and steering 3 become more

direct and provide better contact with the

road surface. The engine reacts more

quickly to accelerator movements.

With automatic transmission 3 the shift

times are reduced and gear changes occur

at higher engine speeds (not when cruise

control 3 is active).

Activating SPORT mode

Press the SPORT button. The LED in the

button illuminates.

In vehicles with automatic transmission 3

the control indicator 1 also illuminates in

the transmission display.

If the winter program has been

switched on 3 (vehicles with automatic

transmission 3) SPORT mode cannot be

activated.

Winter program – see page 180.

Sales designation – see page 280.

199Driving and operation

Deactivating SPORT mode

Briefly press the SPORT button again. The

LED in the button goes out. The Continuous

Damping Control system resumes Normal

mode.

SPORT mode is switched off by switching

off the ignition or switching off the winter

program 3 (vehicles with automatic

transmission 3).

Winter program, see page 180.

Control indicator

u for Continuous

Damping Control or SPORT mode fault

Illuminates for a few seconds after the

ignition is switched on. If the control

indicator does not go out, or if it comes on

while driving, there is a fault in the

Continuous Damping Control system or

SPORT mode. The system is not ready for

operation. Have the cause of the fault

rectified by a workshop.

The system’s integrated self-diagnostics

allows faults to be quickly remedied.

200 Driving and operation

Cruise control 3

Cruise control can store and maintain

speeds of approx. 20 to 125 mph (30 to 200

km/h). Deviation from the saved speed is

possible on uphill or downhill inclines.

For safety reasons the cruise control

cannot be activated until the foot brake

has been operated once.

Cruise control is operated with

buttons m,

g, and § on the turn signal

stalk.

Do not use the cruise control if it is not

advisable to maintain a constant speed

(e.g. in situations presenting a danger to

yourself and other road users, in heavy

traffic or on winding, slippery or greasy

roads).

With automatic transmission 3, only use

cruise control in D or in automatic mode

with Easytronic 3.

When the cruise control is active, reaction

times may be increased due to the different

position of the feet.

Control indicator

Illuminates for a few seconds when the

ignition is switched on. The system is now

ready for operation.

When driving, control indicator m will

illuminates as soon as the system is

switched on.

9 Warning

Even with cruise control activated, the

driver has full responsibility for

maintaining an appropriate speed.

Disregard of these instructions could lead

to injury or danger to life.

201Driving and operation

To activate

Briefly press button m: the current speed is

stored and maintained. The accelerator

pedal can be released.

Vehicle speed can be increased by

depressing the accelerator pedal. When

the accelerator pedal is released, the

previously stored speed is resumed.

Increase

With cruise control active, hold down

button m or briefly press it repeatedly:

speed is increased continuously or in steps

of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the

accelerator pedal.

When button m is released the current

speed is stored and maintained.

Decelerate

With cruise control active, hold down

button

g or briefly press it repeatedly:

speed is reduced continuously or in steps

of 1.2 mph (2 km/h).

When button

g is released the current

speed is stored and maintained.

To deactivate

Briefly press button §: Cruise control is

switched off, control indicator m goes out

and the vehicle slowly decelerates. To

continue driving, depress the accelerator

pedal in the usual manner.

For reasons of safety, cruise control

deactivates under certain driving

conditions.

For example:

z the vehicle’s speed drops below

approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) or

z the brake pedal is depressed or

z the clutch pedal is depressed or

z selector lever of automatic

transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in N.

Resuming the stored speed

Briefly press button g at a speed above

20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected

before the cruise control was switched off

is resumed.

The stored speed value is deleted when the

ignition is switched on.

202 Driving and operation

Parking distance sensor 3

The parking distance sensor makes reverse

parking easier by measuring the distance

between the vehicle and an obstacle, and

giving an acoustic signal in the passenger

compartment.

The system registers distance by means of

four sensors in each of the front and rear

bumpers.

To activate

With the ignition switched on, the front and

rear parking distance sensor systems are

automatically activated when reverse gear

is engaged.

The parking distance sensor can also be

activated at speeds of less than 15 mph

(25 km/h) by pressing the

r button on

the instrument panel.

An illuminated LED and an acoustic signal

indicate that it is ready for operation.

203Driving and operation

If the vehicle approaches an obstacle to

the front or rear, an series of signals is

sounded in the vehicle interior. The interval

between the signals becomes shorter as

the distance is reduced. If the distance is

less than 30 cm, the signal will be

continuous.

To deactivate

To deactivate the system, press button r

again, the LED in the button will go dark.

The system switches itself off automatically

when the forwards speed exceeds

approx. 15 mph (25 km/h).

Control indicator

Illuminates:

Fault in system. The system is not

operational. Have cause of fault remedied

by a workshop. The system’s integrated

self diagnostics allows faults to be quickly

remedied.

Flashes:

The fault is due to sensors obstructed with

snow or ice. The sensors must be

undamaged and free of dirt, snow and ice.

Interference due to external sources of

ultra sound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rotary

machines). Once the source of interference

is removed, the system will operate

normally.

Caravan/trailer towing equipment

caravan/trailer towing

The system automatically detects if a

towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle.

When towing, inserting the trailer plug in

the socket automatically switches off the

parking distance sensor system for the

rear.

Fitting rear load racks

Rear load racks, e.g. bicycle racks, fitted

near the sensors could disrupt the system.

9 Warning

Under certain circumstances, various

reflective surfaces on objects or clothing

as well as external noise sources may

cause the system to fail to detect

obstacles. For this reason, care must be

taken when reversing even if the parking

distance sensor is operational. This is of

particular importance when in the vicinity

of pedestrians.

204 Driving and operation

Automatic level control 3

Automatic level control makes it possible to

keep the height of the vehicle constant

when subjected to different loads in the

rear (e.g. when towing a caravan or trailer).

This significantly improves driving

conditions.

The vehicle is automatically raised at the

rear, increasing the spring travel and

ground clearance.

The automatic level control system is

activated after approx. 2 miles (3 km),

depending on the vehicle loading and the

nature of the road surface.

Headlight range adjustment – see

page 131.

Do not use full load in the event of faults.

Have the cause of the fault rectified

straight away by a workshop.

Tyre pressure monitoring system 3

The tyre pressure monitoring system

continuously monitors the pressure of all

four tyres while the vehicle is being driven.

A pressure sensor is integrated in each

wheel. Once each minute, the pressure of

each tyre is sent to a control unit for

comparision. if the system detects one or

more pressure differences, control

indicator

w illuminates or flashes red. In

vehicles with check control 3, the exact

pressure of the tyre in question appears in

the information display.

In vehicles with graphical information

display 3 or colour information display 3

and trip computer 3, current inflation

pressures can be indicated in the

information display.

For the system to be operational, all wheels

must be equipped with pressure sensors

and all tyres must be inflated to the

prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure

monitoring system automatically detects if

the vehicle is being driven with a load of up

to 3 persons or a full load.

205Driving and operation

Once the ignition is switched on, the system

is operational and will continuously

monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of

approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and above.

Tyre pressure – see pages 213, 288.

Display of current tyre pressure

Select menu item Tyres from the Board

Computer menu.

The current pressure of each tyre is

displayed.

Control indicator

w in red as warning

message

Illumination in red while driving indicates

deviating tyre pressure.

Indicator illuminates red:

Minor tyre pressure difference; slow down.

Check tyre pressure at next opportunity

with a suitable gauge and correct if

necessary.

Indicator flashes red:

Considerable pressure difference or direct

loss of pressure! Stop immediately and

check tyre and tyre pressure. Fit spare

wheel if necessary, see pages 233, 236.

9 Warning

The tyre pressure monitoring system does

not replace manual checks with a

suitable gauge.

Check tyre pressures at least every

14 days and prior to any long journey;

the tyres should be checked when cold.

Don’t forget to check the spare 3.

Ü Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

206 Driving and operation

Warning messages in the graphical

information display 3 or colour information

display 3

In the version with check control 3 differing

tyre pressures while driving are indicated

by messages on the information display.

The message appears in abbreviated form

depending on the version.

For example, the following messages can

be displayed:

A graphic 3 indicating the left rear tyre is

shown together with the current tyre

pressure: Slight pressure deviation. Reduce

speed. Check pressure at next opportunity

with appropriate gauge and correct if

necessary.

On the colour information display this

report will appear in yellow.

A diagram 3 appears at the same time,

marking the front left tyre and showing the

current tyre pressure: Considerable

pressure difference or direct loss of

pressure! Exit flow of traffic as soon as

possible without obstructing other vehicles,

stop and check tyre and tyre pressure.

Fit spare wheel if necessary, see

pages 233, 234.

On the colour information display this

report will appear in red.

Acknowledgement of warnings – see

page 124.

Navi active

Tyre pressure

check rear

left

(value in bar)

Navi active

Attention!

Front left tyre

pressure loss

(value in bar)

207Driving and operation

Control indicator w in yellow as fault

message

If control indicator w illuminates yellow

while driving, there is a fault in the tyre

pressure monitoring system. Fitting a wheel

without a pressure sensor (e.g. the spare

wheel 3) will also generate a fault in the

system. Have the cause of the fault

remedied by a workshop. The system’s

integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to

be quickly remedied.

General information

The tyre pressure monitoring system is not

ready for operation if the emergency/spare

wheel is used and is not fitted with a

pressure sensor; the control indicator

illuminates yellow. The tyre pressure

monitoring system remains operational for

the other three wheels.

If you use a complete set of wheels which

are not fitted with sensors for the tyre

pressure monitoring system, e.g. four

winter tyres or aftermarket tyres of a

different size, no fault message will be

displayed. The tyre pressure monitoring

system is not ready for operation.

Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring

system can be retrofitted by a workshop

upon request.

When manually checking tyre pressure with

a pressure gauge, screw the adapter onto

the valve. Tyre pressure – see page 213.

Every time a tyre is changed, the valve

inserts and tyre pressure monitoring

system sealing rings must be replaced by a

workshop.

The use of commercially available liquid

filled run-flat systems or repair kits can

impair the function of the system.

Vauxhall-approved systems can be used.

Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones,

walkie-talkies) operated in the area could

cause interference in the tyre pressure

monitoring system.

208 Driving and operation

Brake system

The brakes are an important factor for

traffic safety.

To improve effectiveness, do not brake

unnecessarily hard for the first 120 miles

(200 km) after new brake pads have been

fitted.

Brake pad wear must not exceed a

specified limit. Regular maintenance as

detailed in the Service Booklet is therefore

of the utmost importance for traffic safety.

Have worn brake pads replaced by a

workshop.

Pads that have been tested and approved

guarantee optimum brake performance.

Brake assist

If the brake pedal is slammed on, the

vehicle is automatically braked with

maximum brake force amplification in

order to achieve the shortest possible

braking distance when full-on braking

occurs (braking assist).

Maintain steady pressure on the brake

pedal for as long as full-on braking is to

continue. When the brake pedal is

released, the maximum brake force

amplification is taken away.

Adaptive brake light

During full-on braking, all three brake

lights flash for the duration of ABS control.

Foot brake

The foot brake comprises two independent

brake circuits.

If one brake circuit faults, the vehicle can

still be braked with the other brake circuit.

However the braking effect will occur at a

lower pedal position and considerably

more force is required. The braking

distance is longer. Contact a workshop

before continuing to drive.

To ensure that full pedal travel – can be

utilised, particularly if there is a fault in one

of the brake circuits, there must be no mats

in the pedal area, see page 185.

When the engine is not running, the

support of the brake servo unit disappears

once the brake pedal has been depressed

once or twice. Braking effect is not

reduced, but braking requires significantly

greater force. This is especially important

to bear in mind when towing.

209Driving and operation

Check the brake lights before starting out

on a journey. On vehicles with check

control 3 the brake lights are checked

automatically – see page 124.

Shortly after starting each journey the

effectiveness of the brake system should

be tested at low speed and without

inconveniencing other traffic, especially if

the brakes are wet, e.g. after the vehicle

has been washed.

The brake fluid level should be checked

regularly. If the brake fluid level is too low

and the hand brake is not applied, control

indicator R on the instrument panel

illuminates – see page 99.

Hand brake

Always apply the handbrake firmly without

actuating the release button; to do this fold

up the armrest 3. Apply as fully as possible

on uphill or downhill inclines.

The mechanical hand brake acts on the

brakes on the rear wheels. It engages

automatically when applied.

To release the hand brake pull the lever up

slightly, press the release knob, and fully

lower the lever.

To reduce the operating forces of the hand

brake, depress the foot brake at the same

time.

Brake system control indicator R

The control indicator illuminates when the

ignition is switched on if the hand brake is

applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is

too low. Brake fluid – see page 272.

9 Warning

If the control indicator comes on when

the handbrake is released, stop driving

immediately. Contact a workshop.

210 Driving and operation

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS u)

ABS continually monitors the brake system

and prevents the wheels from locking

regardless of the type of road surface or

tyre grip.

It starts to regulate the braking pressure as

soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock.

The vehicle remains steerable, even in the

event of very heavy braking, for instance

on bends or when swerving to avoid an

obstacle. Even in the case of full-on

braking, the ABS makes it possible to drive

round an obstacle without releasing the

brakes.

ABS control is made apparent though a

pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of

the regulation process.

Control indicator u for ABS

It comes on for a few seconds after the

ignition is turned on. The system is ready

for operation when the control indicator

goes out.

If the control indicator does not go out

after a few seconds, or if it illuminates while

driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The

brake system remains operational without

ABS regulation.

Self-check

After every ignition sequence and starting

of the engine, you may hear the system

carrying out self testing once you have

moved off and are moving at a speed in

excess of approx. 2 mph (3 km/h).

Fault

You can continue driving, provided you

drive with care and anticipation.

Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a

workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated

into the system allows rapid fault

identification.

9 Warning

For optimum braking, keep the brake

pedal fully depressed throughout the

braking process, despite the fact that the

pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the

pressure on the pedal.

Do not let this special safety feature

tempt you into taking risks when driving.

Traffic safety can only be achieved by

adopting a responsible driving style.

9 Warning

If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may

be subject to locking due to braking that

is heavier than normal. The advantages

of ABS are no longer operational. The

vehicle can no longer be steered and may

swerve.

211Driving and operation

Wheels, tyres

See page 288 for suitable tyres and

restrictions.

Tyres fitted in the factory are adapted to

the chassis and provide optimum driving

comfort and safety.

Changing tyre/wheel type

Before changing to other tyres or wheels,

note the necessary changes.

If tyres of a different size than those fitted

at the factory are used, the electronic

speedometer may require reprogramming

to ensure that the correct speed is

displayed.

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring

system 3

If you have winter tyres or aftermarket

tyres of a different size fitted, sensors for

the tyre pressure monitoring system can be

retrofitted by a workshop upon request.

Otherwise the system will not display tyre

pressure deviations.

Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see

page 204.

9 Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may

lead to accidents and render the vehicle

unroadworthy.

212 Driving and operation

Fitting new tyres

Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is even

better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are

z the same size

z the same design

z the same make

z and have the same tread pattern.

Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the

direction of travel. The rolling direction is

indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on

the sidewall.

Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction

(e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be

refitted as soon as possible. This is the only

way to obtain full benefit from the design

properties of the tyre.

Some brands of tyres have a beaded edge

for alloy wheels to protect against

damage. If wheel trim is used on steel

wheels with beaded-edge tyres, the

following procedure must be followed:

z Use wheel trims and tyres that are

approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in

question and therefore meet all the

requirements pertaining to the

respective wheel/tyre combination.

z If the wheel trims and tyres used are not

Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not

have a beaded edge.

9 Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims

could lead to sudden loss of air and

thereby accidents.

213Driving and operation

Tyre pressure

Check tyre pressures, including the spare

wheel, at least every 14 days and prior to

any long journey; the tyres should be

checked when cold. Don’t forget to check

the spare.

Use the valve cap key to make unscrewing

the valve caps easier. The key is located on

the inside of the tank flap.

In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring

system 3 there is an adapter in the valve

cap key. Screw adapter to valve before

attaching tyre pressure gauge, see

page 204.

Tyre pressure, see page 288 and the

adhesive foil 3 on the inside of the tank

flap. Have adhesive foil replaced after

changing to different tyre size.

Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres

are warm. Otherwise the pressure may

drop below the permissible minimum when

the tyres cool down.

After having checked the tyre pressures,

tighten the valve caps using the valve cap

key.

Incorrect inflation pressures will impair

safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel

economy and will increase tyre wear.

If the pressure is too low, this can result in

considerable tyre warm-up and internal

damage, leading to tread separation and

even to tyre blow-out at high speeds.

Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by

adjusting the inflation pressure.

9 Warning

Incorrect tyre pressure could lead to a flat

tyre.

214 Driving and operation

Tyre condition, wheel condition

Drive over edges slowly and at a right

angle if possible. Driving over sharp edges

can lead to hidden tyre damage and wheel

damage which is only noticed later on.

When parking, ensure that the tyres are not

pressed against the edge of the kerb.

Check tyres regularly for damage

(penetrated foreign bodies, punctures,

cuts, cracks, bulges in side walls). Check

wheels for damage. If damage or unusual

wear is found, contact a workshop.

Tread depth

Check tread depth regularly.

If wear in the front is greater than that in

the rear, move the rear wheels to the front

axle and vice versa.

Correct tyre pressure.

For reasons of safety, tyres should be

replaced when their tread depth has worn

down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).

9 Warning

Damage may lead to tyre blow-out.

215Driving and operation

The legally permissible minimum tread

depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when

the tread has worn down as far as one of

the wear indicators (TWI

). A number of

wear indicators are spaced at equal

intervals around the tyre within the tread.

Their position is indicated by markings on

the tyre sidewall.

General information

z The danger of aquaplaning is greater if

the tyres are worn.

z Tyres age, even if they are used only very

little or not at all. A spare wheel which

has not been used for six years should be

used only in emergencies; drive slowly

when using such tyres.

z Never fit used tyres the previous history

and use of which you do not know.

z So as not to impair brake cooling, use

only wheel trims approved for use on

your vehicle.

Tyre designations

Meanings:

e.g. 215/55 R 16 93 H

Speed code letters:

TWI = Tread Wear Indicator.

215 =Tyre width in mm

55 = Cross-section ratio

(tyre height to width) in %

R =Belt type: Radial

16 = Wheel diameter in inch

93 = Load index e.g. 93 corresponds

to 654 kg

H = Speed code letter

Q Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

S Up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T Up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H Up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V Up to 150 mph (240 km/h)

W Up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

216 Driving and operation

Winter tyres 3

For notes on fitting new tyres – see

page 212.

See page 288 for restrictions.

Winter tyres improve safety at

temperatures below 7 °C and should

therefore be fitted on all the wheels.

The design of summer tyres means they

have limited qualities for winter driving.

If the maximum permissible speed for the

winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle,

a notice indicating the maximum

permissible speed for the tyres must be

affixed within the driver’s field of vision

If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted

with a summer tyre, the vehicle’s

driveability may be affected, especially on

slippery road surfaces. Obtain a

replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as

possible, and have the wheel balanced

and fitted to the vehicle.

Wheel trims 3

If the wheel trims and tyres used are not

Vauxhall-approved, make sure that the

tyres do not have a beaded edge,

see page 212.

Varies from country to country on account of

national regulations.

217Driving and operation

Tyre chains 3

Limitations and further information – see

page 288.

Tyre chains are only permitted on the drive

wheels (front axle). They must be fitted to

the tyres symmetrically in order to achieve

a concentric fit.

Always use fine mesh chains that add no

more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the

inboard sides (including chain lock).

Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into

contact with parts of the chain and be

damaged. Remove the wheel trim – see

page 237.

Tyre chains may only be used at speeds up

to 30 mph (50 km/h) and, when travelling

on roads that are free of snow, they may be

used for brief periods only since they are

subject to rapid wear on a hard road and

may snap.

Temporary wheel

Tyre chains must not be used on the

temporary spare wheel. If you need to use

tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre,

fit the temporary spare on the rear axle

and transfer one of the rear wheels to the

front axle.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel –

see page 234.

Wheel changing – see page 236.

Correct tyre pressure.

Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see

page 204.

218 Driving and operation

Roof racks 3

For safety reasons and to avoid roof

damage, we recommend using the

Vauxhall roof rack system approved for

your vehicle.

Fasten the roof rack following the

instructions that accompany the system.

Driving hints – see page 184.

Version without roof railing

Fold fitting opening covers upward.

Attach roof rack at appropriate points, see

enclosed roof luggage rack system

instructions.

Version with roof railing 3

Attach roof rack to roof railing at points

shown in figure, see enclosed roof luggage

rack system instructions.

9 Warning

Disregard of these notes can lead to

injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle

passengers should be informed

accordingly.

219Driving and operation

Towing equipment 3

Only use a trailer towing device approved

for the vehicle. Have a towing device fitted

by workshop, who will inform you of any

possible trailer load increases. They will

have the instructions for fitting the device

and any necessary changes to the vehicle

concerning cooling, heat shields or other

devices.

Mounting dimensions of towing

equipment – see page 297.

Towing equipment with

removable coupling ball bar 3

Stowage of coupling ball bar

The coupling ball bar is stored in a bag

strapped to the spare wheel.

Fitting the coupling ball bar

Compress the sealing plugs at the ends

and pull out of the opening for the coupling

ball bar. Stow the sealing plugs in the

luggage compartment. Disengage socket

and fold down 3.

9 Warning

Disregard of these notes can lead to

injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle

passengers should be informed

accordingly.

9 Warning

The coupling ball bar is to be removed

when not towing.

220 Driving and operation

Checking the tensioning of the coupling

ball bar

z Red marking on turn knob points

towards green marking on coupling ball

bar.

z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between

rotary knob and coupling ball bar.

z Key is in lock.

Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be

tensioned before it is inserted into the

coupling housing:

z Open coupling ball bar.

z Pull turn knob out and then turn it

clockwise as far as it will go – see figure.

Inserting the coupling ball bar

Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar in the

coupling housing and push firmly upwards

until you hear the coupling ball bar

engaging.

The turn knob snaps back into its home

position resting against the coupling ball

bar.

9 Warning

Do not touch the turn knob when

inserting the coupling ball bar – risk of

injury.

221Driving and operation

Open coupling ball bar. Remove key and

put on provided protective clip.

When the coupling ball bar is locked the

turn knob can no longer be pulled out.

Important

Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly

installed:

z Red marking on turn knob points

towards white marking on coupling ball

bar.

z No gap between turn knob and coupling

ball bar.

z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly

in coupling housing.

z Coupling ball bar must be locked and

key must be removed.

Eye for break-away stopping cable

In the case of caravans/trailers with brake,

attach the break-away stopping cable to

the eye. Eye - see Fig. 17721 J.

Dismounting the coupling ball bar

Close coupling ball bar.

Pull the turn knob out and then turn it

clockwise as far as it will go. Pull the

coupling ball bar downwards out of the

coupling housing and stow it in the

luggage compartment – see page 219,

Fig. 17833 J.

Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the

coupling ball bar. Fold away the socket –

see page 219, Fig. 17717 J.

Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other

high-pressure cleaners to clean the

coupling ball bar.

9 Warning

Towing is permitted only with a correctly

fitted towbar. If the towbar cannot be

fitted correctly, contact a workshop.

222 Driving and operation

Caravan/trailer towing

Caravan and trailer loads

The permissible caravan/trailer loads are

vehicle- and engine-dependent maximum

values which must not be exceeded. The

actual caravan/trailer load is the difference

between the actual gross weight of the

caravan/trailer and the actual coupling

socket load with the caravan/trailer

attached. When the caravan/trailer load is

being checked, therefore, only the

caravan/trailer wheels – and not the jockey

wheel – must be standing on the weighing

apparatus.

The permissible caravan/trailer loads for

your vehicle are given in the vehicle

documents. Unless otherwise stated, they

are valid for gradients up to max. 12%.

The permissible caravan/trailer load should

be fully utilised only by drivers who are

adequately experienced in towing large or

heavy caravans/trailers.

The permitted caravan/trailer load applies

up to the specified incline and up to an

altitude of 1000 metres above sea level.

Since engine power decreases as altitude

increases because of the air becoming

thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability,

the permitted towing weight also

decreases by 10% for every 1000 metres of

additional altitude. The towing weight

does not have to be reduced when driving

on roads with slight inclines (less than 8%,

e.g. motorways).

The actual caravan/trailer load plus the

actual gross weight of the towing vehicle

must not exceed the maximum permitted

towing weight. For example, if the

permitted gross vehicle weight is utilised,

the trailer/caravan load must only be used

until the maximum permitted towing

weight is reached. The maximum

permitted towing weight is shown on the

identification plate, see page 278.

Coupling socket load

The coupling socket load is the load

exerted by the trailer/caravan on the

coupling ball. It can be varied by changing

the weight distribution when loading the

trailer/caravan.

The maximum permissible coupling socket

load (78 kg) is specified on the towing

equipment identification plate and in the

vehicle documents. Always aim for the

maximum load, especially in the case of

heavy caravans/trailers. The coupling

socket load should never fall below 25 kg.

When measuring the coupling socket load,

make sure that the drawbar of the loaded

trailer/caravan is at the same height as it

will be when the trailer/caravan is coupled

with the towing vehicle loaded. Particularly

important for trailers/caravans with

tandem axle.

Observe national regulations.

223Driving and operation

Rear axle load during towing

When the caravan/trailer is coupled up and

the towing vehicle is fully loaded, including

all occupants, the permissible rear axle

load (for information, see the identification

plate or vehicle documentation) may be

exceeded by 30 kg. The gross vehicle

weight rating must not be exceeded in the

process.

If the permissible rear axle load is

exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mph

(100 km/h) must be applied. If lower

national speed limits are prescribed for

vehicles towing caravans/trailers, these

must be observed.

Tyre pressure

Adjust the tyre pressure on the towing

vehicle to the value specified for a full load,

see page 288. Also check the pressure of

the caravan/trailer wheels and the spare

wheel.

Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA)

TSA monitors vehicle movements when

towing a caravan or trailer. If the system

detects lurching movements, engine power

is reduced and the vehicle/trailer

combination is selectively braked until the

lurching ceases.

TSA is a function of the electronic stability

program (ESP

Plus

), see page 196.

224 Driving and operation

Driving characteristics, towing tips

In the case of trailers/caravans with brakes,

attach breakaway stopping cable to eye.

Before attaching the trailer/caravan,

lubricate the ball of the trailer/caravan

towing device. However, do not lubricate

the ball if a stabiliser, which acts on the

coupling ball, is being used to damp

hunting.

Check caravan/trailer lighting before

starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the

vehicle are deactivated when towing a

caravan or trailer.

Caravan/trailers with LED turn signals must

have a provision that makes it possible to

monitor standard light bulbs.

Turn signal control indicator – see page 98.

The Parking distance sensor system at the

rear 3 is deactivated when towing a

caravan/trailer.

Handling is greatly influenced by the

loading of the trailer/caravan. Loads

should therefore be secured so that they

cannot slip and be placed in the centre of

the trailer/caravan if possible, i.e. above

the axle.

When pulling trailers whose stability on the

road is low, and caravans whose permitted

total weight exceeds 1500 kg, speeds

should be kept below 50 mph (80 km/h);

the use of an anti-hunting damper is

emphatically recommended.

Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)

if possible, even in countries where higher

speeds are permitted.

Make sure that you have enough room

when cornering and avoid sudden

manoeuvres.

If the trailer/caravan starts to sway, drive

more slowly, do not attempt to correct the

steering and brake sharply if necessary.

If it is necessary to apply the brakes fully,

depress the brake pedal as hard as

possible.

Remember that the braking distance for

vehicles towing caravans/trailers with and

without brake is always greater than that

for vehicles not towing a caravan/trailer.

When driving downhill, the brakes are

under considerably more load when towing

a caravan/trailer. For this reason, drive in

the same gear as if driving uphill and drive

at a similar speed.

Automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3

in automatic mode will automatically

select the driving program with the

optimum engine braking effect.

If necessary, the gears can also be selected

manually.

225Driving and operation

The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its

cooling power is therefore independent of

the engine speed.

Since a considerable amount of heat is

generated at high engine speeds and less

at slower speeds, do not shift down when

climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping

with the gradient in the higher gear.

Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10%

or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph

(30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 km/h)

in 2nd gear; with automatic transmission

3, do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in

position 1.

Starting on inclines

For vehicles with manual transmission,

the most favourable engine speed when

starting off on an incline is between 2500

and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and

between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel

engines. Hold engine speed constant,

engage clutch gradually (let slip), release

hand brake and open throttle. If possible,

the engine speed should not drop during

this procedure.

For vehicles with automatic transmission 3

or Easytronic 3 in automatic mode it is

sufficient to apply full throttle.

Before starting off under extreme

conditions (high combination weight,

mountainous terrain with steep inclines),

switch off all unnecessary electrical loads

(e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning

system 3, heated seats 3).

226 Self-help, vehicle care

Self-help, vehicle care

Diesel fuel system, bleeding

Never let the tank run dry! If control

indicator Y illuminates, refuel as soon as

possible. Refuel immediately if it flashes.

Restarting after running out of fuel is

possible, but starting behaviour will be

delayed. Turn on the ignition three times

for 15 seconds each time. Then start the

engine for a maximum of 40 seconds. If it

does not start, repeat the process after

waiting at least 5 seconds. If the engine still

does not start, contact a workshop.

Bonnet

To open the bonnet, pull the release lever

located on the driver’s side below the

instrument panel. The bonnet will then be

unlocked and will partially open. Return

release lever to its original position.

Diesel fuel system, bleeding ............... 226

Bonnet .................................................. 226

Starting................................................. 227

Towing.................................................. 230

Warning triangle ¨3,

first-aid kit +3.................................. 232

Spare wheel 3...................................... 233

Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 ............ 235

Changing wheels ................................. 236

Tyre repair kit 3................................... 239

Electrical system .................................. 243

Fuses and the most important circuits

they protect ....................................... 245

Bulb replacement ................................ 249

Halogen headlight system dipped

and main beam................................. 250

Xenon headlight system, dipped and

main beam ........................................ 252

Adaptive Forward Lighting system 3 254

Halogen headlight system, Xenon

headlight system, parking lights ..... 254

Tail lights .............................................. 255

Number plate light .............................. 257

Courtesy light....................................... 258

Vehicle care.......................................... 260

9 Warning

Disregard of these notes can lead to

injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle

passengers should be informed

accordingly.

227Self-help, vehicle care

There is a safety catch on the underside of

the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the

bonnet.

Dirt or snow on the bonnet may drop onto

the windscreen when the bonnet is opened

and block the air intake.

Air intake – see page 166.

To hold the bonnet open, insert the support

located on the left side in the small slot on

the underside of the bonnet.

Before closing, fasten the support in its

retainer. Lower the bonnet and allow it to

fall into its catch.

Check that the bonnet is locked in position

by pulling at its front edge. If it is not

engaged, repeat the procedure.

Starting

Do not start with quick charger

This prevents damage to electronic

components.

Do not start by pushing or towing

Because your vehicle is fitted with a

catalytic converter, it must not be started

by pushing or towing – see page 190.

The vehicle can only be started using jump

leads – see following page.

228 Self-help, vehicle care

Starting the engine with jump leads 3

A vehicle with a discharged battery can be

started using jump leads and the battery of

another vehicle.

z Never expose the battery to naked

flames or sparks.

z A discharged battery can freeze at

temperatures as low as 0 °C. Defrost the

battery before connecting jump leads.

z Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or

painted surfaces. The fluid contains

sulphuric acid which can cause injuries

and damage in the event of direct

contact.

z Wear eye protection and protective

clothing when handling a battery.

z Use auxiliary battery with same voltage

(12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) must not be

considerably less than that of the

discharged battery. Voltage and

capacity information can be found on

the batteries.

z Use jump leads with insulated terminals

and a cross section of at least 16 mm

(25 mm

for diesel engines).

z Do not disconnect the discharged

battery from the vehicle.

z Switch off all unnecessary electrical

consumers.

z Do not lean over the battery during jump

starting.

z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to

touch those of the other lead.

z Do not touch the vehicles while jump

starting.

z Apply hand brake. Manual transmission

or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic

transmission 3 in P.

The battery is in a box at the front of the

engine compartment, on the right-hand

side as viewed from the front. To open the

box, pull the cover forwards and swing it

upwards.

9 Warning

Be extremely careful when starting with

jump leads. Any deviation from the

following instructions can lead to injuries

or damage caused by battery explosion

or damage to the electrical systems of

both vehicles.

229Self-help, vehicle care

Connect the leads in the order shown in the

illustration:

1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to

the positive terminal 1 of the battery

providing the jump start (identified by

"+" sign on battery case or terminal).

2. Connect the other end of this lead to the

positive terminal 2 of the discharged

battery ("+" sign).

3. Connect the first end of the other jump

lead to the negative terminal 3 of the

battery providing the start ("–" sign).

4. Connect the other end of the second

jump lead 4 to ground on the other

vehicle, e.g. engine block or screw

connection in the engine suspension.

z Do not connect leads to negative

terminal of discharged battery!

z The connection point should be as far

away from the discharged battery as

possible.

z Route the leads so that they cannot

catch on rotating parts in the engine

compartment.

z Start the engine of the vehicle providing

the jump start.

z After 5 minutes, start the other engine.

Start attempts should be made at

intervals of 1 minute not last longer

than 15 seconds.

z After starting, allow both engines to idle

for approx. 3 minutes with the leads

connected.

z In order to avoid excess voltage in the

electrical system, before removing a

lead, switch on an electrical consumer

(e.g. light, heated rear window) in the

vehicle receiving the jump start.

z Reverse above sequence exactly when

removing leads.

230 Self-help, vehicle care

Towing

Towing your own vehicle

To open the cover concealing the towing

eye at the front right of the vehicle:

disengage the cover at the bottom and pull

it off downwards.

The towing eye is located in the

compartment containing the jack and

vehicle tools underneath the spare wheel in

the luggage compartment. Vehicle jack

and tools – see page 235.

Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far

as it will go until it stops in a horizontal

position.

Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow

rod 3 – to the eye.

The towing eye may be used only for

towing the vehicle, not for rescuing it.

Switch on ignition to release steering

column lock and to permit operation of

brake lights, horn and windscreen wipers.

Manual transmission or Easytronic 3 in

neutral, automatic transmission 3 in N.

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive

tractive force can damage the vehicle.

To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes from

the towing vehicle, switch on the air

recirculation 3 and close the windows.

Vehicles with automatic transmission 3

should be towed facing forward only and

must not be towed faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km).

If the transmission is defective, or if the

above speed or distance is to be exceeded,

the front axle must be raised off the

ground.

9 Warning

For braking and steering, significantly

higher forces are required: brake

assistance and steering assistance are

effective only with the engine running.

231Self-help, vehicle care

Contact a workshop.

If the automatic clutch is released

manually after a power failure on vehicles

with Easytronic 3, towing is not permitted,

see page 174. In this case, contact a

workshop immediately.

After towing, unscrew towing eye by

rotating clockwise and insert and close the

cap.

Towing service

Entrust your vehicle only to the towing

service of your choice and obtain an

estimate on towing costs before employing

any towing service. In this way you avoid

unnecessary costs and possible insurance

problems during claim processing.

Towing another vehicle

To open the cover concealing the towing

eye socket at the rear right of the vehicle:

disengage the cover at the bottom and pull

it off downwards.

The towing eye is located in the

compartment containing the jack and

vehicle tools underneath the spare wheel in

the luggage compartment. Vehicle jack

and tools – see page 235.

Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far

as it will go until it stops in a horizontal

position.

Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow

rod 3 – to the eye.

The towing eye may be used only for

towing the vehicle, not for rescuing it.

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive

tractive force can damage the vehicle.

After towing, unscrew towing eye by

rotating clockwise and insert and close the

cap.

232 Self-help, vehicle care

Warning triangle ¨3,

first-aid kit +3

Store the warning triangle and the first-aid

kit (or cushion) in the stowage

compartment in the luggage compartment

right-hand side trim.

To open the cover, push bar downward

and flip open the cover.

When loading vehicle, always ensure that

warning triangle, first-aid cushion or first-

aid kit is accessible.

233Self-help, vehicle care

Spare wheel 3

Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre

repair kit instead of a spare wheel. See

page 239.

The spare wheel (temporary spare wheel) is

stowed in the luggage compartment under

the floor cover.

To open the floor cover, fold out release

lever by pushing at the marked point and

raise up the floor cover all the way.

Remove protective cap and slacken wing

nut. Remove spare wheel temporary spare

wheel). The vehicle tools and the jack are

beneath the spare wheel.

Storing a defective full specification

wheel in the spare wheel well

The spare wheel well is designed to hold an

temporary spare wheel. Proceed as follows

to store a defective full specification wheel

after fitting the temporary spare wheel to

the vehicle:

Lower floor cover.

Unscrew screw clip securing the floor cover

(see Fig. 17842 J), lift the cover up again

and hold it open. Guide the lashing eyes

out of the recesses in the floor cover, see

Fig. 17843 J, next page.

Remove spacer ring in spare wheel well.

234 Self-help, vehicle care

Stow away vehicle tools and jack – see

page 235. Place defective wheel in spare

wheel well with outside facing upward.

Place spacer ring in centre of defective

wheel.

Place the floor cover over wheel. Do not

insert screw clip.

Place heavy load in central position.

Keep protective cap, wing nut and

fastening clips for floor cover in a safe

place.

Replace defective wheel as soon as

possible, balance wheel and fit to vehicle.

Before storing temporary spare wheel,

insert spacer ring and store vehicle tools –

see page 235. Secure temporary spare

wheel using wing nut and fit protective

cap. Fit floor cover. Guide lashing eyes

through recesses. Push in screw clip for

attaching floor cover (arrow in Fig. 17842 J

on previous page).

Notes on temporary spare wheel

z Using a temporary spare wheel may

change the driving behaviour of the

vehicle, particularly if using winter

tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly

as possible, balance wheel and fit to

vehicle.

z Fit only one temporary spare wheel.

z Do not drive faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

z Take curves slowly.

z Do not use the temporary spare wheel

for a lengthy period.

z Replace temporary spare wheel with full

specification wheel without delay.

z Tyre chains are not permitted on the

temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains

have to be used after a front wheel

puncture, fit temporary spare wheel to

the rear axle and fit a rear wheel to the

front axle. Check tyre pressure and

correct if necessary, see page 213.

z Follow temporary spare wheel

instructions on pages 217, 288.

235Self-help, vehicle care

Notes on directional tyres 3

Directional tyres only achieve their full

performance potential when mounted in

the prescribed direction of rotation. If after

a flat tyre the tyre or spare wheel is

mounted against the prescribed direction

of rotation, observe the following:

z Driving conditions may be altered.

Replace the defective tyre as soon as

possible, balance the wheel and mount it

on the vehicle.

z Do not drive faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

z Drive especially carefully in wet or snowy

weather.

For further information on directional

tyres – see page 212.

Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3

The jack and the vehicle tools have been

specially developed for your vehicle and

must only be used on that vehicle. Only use

jack for changing wheels.

Vehicles with tyre repair kit 3

The vehicle tools are stored in the luggage

compartment together with the tyre repair

kit in a compartment beneath the floor

cover.

Vehicles with spare wheel 3

The jack and vehicle tools are located in a

compartment in the luggage

compartment, beneath the spare wheel.

To open the floor cover, see page 233.

After use, stow away the jack and tools in

the compartment as shown in illustration.

236 Self-help, vehicle care

Changing wheels

There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a

spare wheel – see page 239.

To ensure your safety, make the following

preparations and observe the following

information when changing wheels:

z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and non-

skid surface.

z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply

hand brake, automatic transmission 3 -

selector lever in P, manual transmission

or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse

gear.

z Correctly set up the warning triangle.

Warning triangle – see page 232.

z Remove spare wheel from luggage

compartment, see previous page 233.

z Before raising the vehicle, set the front

wheels to the straight-ahead position.

z Slacken the wheel bolts one half turn

before raising the vehicle, but do not

totally unscrew the bolts.

z Never change more than one wheel at

once.

z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the

wheel to be changed by placing wedge

blocks or equivalent in front and behind

the wheel.

z Use the jack only to change wheels.

z If the ground on which the vehicle is

standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm

thick) should be placed under the jack 3.

Using a thicker board could damage the

jack 3 and the vehicle.

z No people or animals may be in the

vehicle when it is jacked up.

z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle.

z Do not start or run the engine while the

vehicle is on the jack.

z Before inserting the wheel bolts when

changing wheels, lightly grease the cone

of each bolt. For this reason, carry some

conventional grease.

237Self-help, vehicle care

1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook

included with the vehicle tools. Vehicle

tools – see page 235.

If the wheel trim has visible wheel bolts 3,

the trim can remain on the wheel. The

retaining washers 3 on the wheel bolts

must not be removed.

Alloy wheels 3: Disengage the wheel bolt

caps with a screwdriver and remove.

Protect the wheel by inserting a soft cloth

between the screwdriver and ally wheel.

2. Turn wheel bolts half a turn using the

wheel bolt wrench 3, pushing the

wrench 3 on as far as possible.

238 Self-help, vehicle care

3. There are plastic retainers at the front

and rear of the vehicle underbody for

positioning the jack. The location of each

retainer is indicated by a mark on the

bottom edge of the vehicle.

4. Before attaching jack 3 set to required

height by turning the eye by hand. Fit the

jack 3 at the front – or rear – in such a

way that the jack head engages in the

plastic retainer beneath the vehicle.

Check that it is properly engaged.

The jack base must be on the ground

directly below the jacking point in a

manner that prevents it from slipping.

Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and

turn crank to raise vehicle.

If this is not the case, carefully lower the

vehicle immediately and reposition the

jack.

5. Unscrew wheel bolts and wipe clean with

a cloth. Then apply a light coating of

grease to the wheel bolts. Do not grease

the thread of the bolts. Do not put the

wheel bolts down in a location where

they may become soiled.

If the wheel bolts have retaining

washers 3, they must not be removed.

239Self-help, vehicle care

6. Change the wheel. For notes on

temporary spare wheel – see page 234.

7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly,

inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far

as possible.

8. Lower vehicle.

9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on

wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible.

10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clean the

wheel around the retaining clips. Valve

symbol 3 on back of wheel trim must

point towards valve on wheel.

Align and refit wheel trim or wheel bolt

caps 3.

Alloy wheels 3: Align and refit wheel

bolt caps 3.

11. Stow replaced wheel, tools and warning

triangle in luggage compartment – see

pages 232, 233 and 235.

12. Check the tyre pressure of the newly

mounted wheel. Correct if necessary.

13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel

bolts on the new wheel checked on the

vehicle using a torque wrench as soon

as possible and, if necessary, corrected.

Tightening torque – see page 288.

14. Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel

that was removed.

15.Replace temporary spare wheel with a

full specification wheel without delay.

Tyre repair kit 3

Minor damage to the tyre tread or side

wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, can be

repaired using the tyre repair kit.

Do not remove the foreign body from the

tyre.

Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that is on

the rim cannot be repaired with the tyre

repair kit.

Important information – see page 243.

In the event of a flat tyre:

z Switch on hazard warning lights,

apply hand brake; for automatic

transmission 3, move selector lever to P;

for manual transmission or Easytronic 3,

select 1st or reverse gear.

z Correctly set up the warning triangle.

Warning triangle – see page 235.

9 Warning

Driving with tyre pressures too low or

tyres deflated can cause invisible

damage to the tyre. This damage cannot

be eliminated with a tyre repair kit. Park

the vehicle and contact a workshop.

240 Self-help, vehicle care

The tyre repair kit is in a compartment in

the spare wheel well of the luggage

compartment.

1. Take the pouch with the tyre repair kit

from the compartment. Carefully remove

the components from the pouch.

2. Remove the compressor.

3. Remove the electrical connection cable

and air hose from the stowage

compartments on the underside of the

compressor.

4. Screw the compressor air hose to the

connection on the sealant bottle.

5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on

the compressor.

Set the compressor near the tyre in such

a way that the sealant bottle is upright.

6. Remove the valve cap from the defective

tyre.

241Self-help, vehicle care

7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve.

8. The switch on the compressor must be

set to §.

9. Connect the compressor plug to the

accessory socket or cigarette lighter

socket. Accessory socket – see page 94.

10. Switch on ignition.

To prevent battery discharge, we

recommend that you leave the engine

running.

11. Set the rocker switch on the compressor

to I. The tyre is filled with sealant.

12.While the sealant bottle drains (approx.

30 seconds) the pressure indicator on

the compressor briefly points to 6 bar.

Pressure then sinks again.

13. All of the sealant is pumped into the

tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled with

air.

14. The prescribed tyre pressure – see

page 288 should be reached within

10 minutes. Switch off the compressor

when the correct pressure is obtained.

If the specified tyre pressure is not

reached within 10 minutes, remove the

tyre repair kit. Move the vehicle through

one tyre rotation, approx. 2 metres, in

either direction. Reconnect the tyre

repair kit and continue the filling

process for 10 minutes. If the specified

tyre pressure is still not reached, the tyre

is too badly damaged. Park the vehicle

and contact a workshop.

242 Self-help, vehicle care

Drain excess tyre pressure with the

button over the pressure indicator.

Do not run the compressor for more

than 10 minutes, see "Important

information" on page 243.

15. Detach the tyre repair kit. Screw the

filler hose to the free connection on the

sealant bottle. This prevents sealant

leakage. Stow the tyre repair kit in the

luggage compartment.

16. Wipe away any sealant spill with a

cloth.

17. Dismantle the warning triangle and

stow it in the luggage compartment –

see page 232.

18. The enclosed sticker shows the

maximum permitted speed at which the

tyre repair may be used. Apply sticker in

the driver’s field of vision.

19. Continue driving immediately to allow

the sealant to distribute evenly

throughout the tyre. Stop after approx.

6 miles /10 km (no more than 10

minutes) and check tyre pressure. Screw

the compressor air hose directly onto

the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T).

If tyre pressure is more than 1.3 bar,

adjust to the prescribed value. Repeat

the procedure until there is no more

pressure loss.

If the tyre pressure has fallen below

1.3 bar, the vehicle may no longer be

used. Contact a workshop.

20. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage

compartment – see page 239.

243Self-help, vehicle care

Important

The driving comfort of the repaired tyre is

severely affected, therefore have this tyre

replaced.

If the compressor makes abnormal noises

or heats up greatly, switch it off for at

least 30 minutes.

The integrated safety valve opens at a

pressure of 7 bar.

Protect the compressor from moisture and

rain.

The sealant can only be stored for approx.

4 years. After this time, the sealing

properties can no longer be guaranteed.

Heed the expiration date on the sealant

bottle.

The sealant bottle can only be used once.

Replace a used sealant bottle.

The compressor and sealant can be used

from approx. -30 °C.

Dispose of a used tyre repair kit in

accordance with applicable legislation.

The adapter 3 supplied may be used to

pump up other objects, such as balls,

airbeds, dinghies.

This is located on the underside of the

compressor. To remove, unscrew the

compressor air hose and pull out the

adapter.

When using the tyre repair kit, no consumer

may be connected to the front accessory

socket at the same time.

Electrical system

Fuses

There are three fuse boxes in the vehicle: in

the passenger compartment on the far left

of the dashboard, in the luggage

compartment on the left in the stowage

compartment, and in the engine

compartment front left.

9 Warning

Do not drive faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

Do not use the temporary spare wheel for

a lengthy period.

Steerability and driving behaviour may

be impaired.

9 Warning

Electronic ignition systems generate very

high voltages. Do not touch the ignition

system; high voltage can be fatal.

244 Self-help, vehicle care

We recommend carrying a complete set of

fuses.

Spare fuses are kept on back of fuse box

cover at instrument panel. For opening

cover – see next page.

Before replacing a fuse, turn off the

respective switch and the ignition.

A defective fuse (Fig. 17259 T) can be

recognised by its melted wire. A new fuse

should only be installed after the cause of

the fault has been rectified.

There is fuse extractor on the rear of the

fuse box cover on the instrument panel for

changing fuses – see figure above.

Only fit fuses of the specified current

rating. Each fuse has its current rating

written on it, in addition the ratings are

colour coded.

Fuse, Fuse,

colour rating

Brownish yellow 5 A

Brown 7.5 A

Red 10 A

Blue 15 A

Yellow 20 A

Transparent 25 A

Green 30 A

Orange 40 A

Dark blue 60 A

245Self-help, vehicle care

Fuses and the most important

circuits they protect

Fuse box in passenger compartment

The fuse box is on the left, on the outside of

the instrument panel. Open door.

Disengage cover by pulling firmly and

remove.

Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 244.

Some circuits may be protected by several

fuses.

No. Circuit Rating

1 Infotainment system,

radio transport fuse

20 A

2 Interior fan, heating,

air conditioning system

7.5 A

3 Sun roof 20 A

4 ––

5 Door module control unit 7.5 A

6 Brake light 7.5 A

7 Bodywork module control

unit

30 A

8 Control unit

Front passenger door

module

30 A

9 Central control module 7.5 A

No. Circuit Rating

10 Control unit

Steering column module

7.5 A

11 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A

12 Battery overload protection 15 A

13 ––

14 ––

15 Door module control unit 30 A

16 ––

17 Instruments, information

display

15 A

18 ––

19 ––

20 Yaw rate sensor (ESP®

Plus

)7.5 A

21 ––

22 Cigarette lighter 30 A

23 Interior fan, air conditioning,

climate control system 30 A

40 A

24 ––

25 Heating, air conditioning

system

7.5 A

26 Instruments,

information display

7.5 A

27 ––

246 Self-help, vehicle care

Fuse box in luggage compartment

The fuse box is located on the left side of

the luggage compartment, in the stowage

compartment.

Press down both bars and open the cover.

Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 244.

Some circuits may be protected by several

fuses.

No. Circuit Rating

1 ––

2 ––

3 Electric seat adjustment,

driver’s seat

40 A

4 Heated rear window 40 A

5 Electric seat adjustment,

front passenger seat

40 A

6 Electric window operation,

right rear

30 A

7 Electric window operation,

left rear

30 A

8 Seat heating, rear right 15 A

9 Horn, Vauxhall alarm

system

15 A

10 Fuel pump 20 A

No. Circuit Rating

11 Battery voltage 25 A

12 Seat heating, rear left 15 A

13 Towing equipment 20 A

14 Tailgate wiper 15 A

15 Heated seats, seat climate

control, left front

15 A

16 Seat heating, front right 15 A

17 Accessory socket 15 A

18 ––

19 Terminal 30, Twin Audio 10 A

20 Fuel filler cap locking 7.5 A

21 Ultrasonic sensor, Vauxhall

alarm system

5 A

22 ––

23 Glass breakage sensor

(Vauxhall alarm system)

7.5 A

24 Battery voltage 25 A

25 Electronic chassis 10 A

26 Terminal 15 (ignition lock),

Twin Audio

25 A

27 Seat occupancy

recognition, tyre pressure

monitoring system, rain

sensor, air conditioning

system

5 A

28 Parking distance sensor 7.5 A

29 ––

247Self-help, vehicle care

Fuse box in engine compartment

The fuse box is in the box at the front left

side of the engine compartment.

To open, disengage front battery cover

and tilt upwards.

Disengage the bar at the front of the cover

of fuse box and swing it upwards.

Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 244.

Some circuits may be protected by several

fuses.

9 Warning

Switch off engine before opening the fuse

box in the engine compartment, risk of

injury.

No. Circuit Rating

1 Engine electronics,

transmission electronics

20 A

2 Starter 25 A

3 Horn 20 A

4 Air conditioning system,

climate control system

10 A

5 Windscreen wash system,

front and rear

15 A

6 Diesel fuel filter heating 30 A

248 Self-help, vehicle care

No. Circuit Rating

7 Central control unit,

ESP®

Plus

15 A

8 Headlights, windscreen

washing nozzles

10 A

9 Power steering, brake servo 7.5 A

10 Adaptive Forward Lighting 10 A

11 Windscreen wipers 30 A

12 Central control unit,

ESP®

Plus

7.5 A

13 Headlight wash system 30 A

14 Oxygen sensor 10 A

15 Engine control unit

The brake lights are on all the time if the

fuse is defective and the ignition is

switched on.

10 A

16 ABS 5 A

No. Circuit Rating

17 ––

18 ––

19 Adaptive Forward Lighting,

headlight range

adjustment

15 A

20 Headlight range

adjustment

5 A

21 ––

22 Windscreen wipers 30 A

23 Auxiliary heating 20 A

24 Battery voltage,

terminal 30

30 A

25 Battery voltage,

terminal 30

30 A

26 ––

No. Circuit Rating

27 Easytronic 30 A

28 Tailgate module control unit 60 A

29 ABS 40 A

30 Tailgate module control unit 60 A

31 Vehicle interior module

control unit

60 A

32 ABS 40 A

33 Vehicle interior module

control unit

60 A

34 Tailgate module control unit 60 A

35 Cooling fan

Depending on engine.

30 A

40 A

36 Cooling fan

Brake servo

20 A

30 A

37 Adaptive Forward Lighting

(AFL): Slot for changing to

symmetrical dipped beam

for driving abroad, see

page 136

Insert

any

maxi-

fuse

38 ––

249Self-help, vehicle care

Bulb replacement

Before replacing a bulb, switch ignition off

and switch relevant switch off.

Only hold new bulb at base! Do not touch

the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise

fingerprints on the glass evaporate.

Residue builds up on the reflector

eventually resulting in a dull reflector.

Inadvertently stained bulbs may be

cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using

alcohol or white spirits.

Replacement bulb must be in accordance

with data on base of defective bulb. Do not

exceed wattage given on bulb base.

To change the lights on the left-hand side,

remove filler neck from windscreen wash

system bottle to gain better access:

disengage retaining clamp and withdraw

filler neck by pulling upwards. Wash fluid

may escape if the bottle is full.

As the headlight has to be removed, have

the bulb on the right changed by a

workshop.

Headlight aiming

We recommend that headlight adjustment

be carried out by a workshop which will

have special equipment.

Manual headlight range adjustment 3

must be set to 0 when adjusting the

headlights.

9 Warning

Protect the environment. Do not allow

wash fluid to seep into the ground or

drain into the sewage system.

250 Self-help, vehicle care

Halogen headlight system dipped

and main beam

Headlights with separate systems for main

beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2

(outer bulbs).

Dipped beam

1. Open bonnet.

2. To change the bulb on the left, remove

filler neck from windscreen wash system

bottle, see page 249. As the headlight

has to be removed, have the bulb on the

right changed by a workshop.

3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise

and remove.

4. Push down bulb at bulb holder.

251Self-help, vehicle care

5. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from

the reflector.

6. Detach bulb from bulb mounting.

7. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting,

without touching the glass.

8. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on

the bulb mounting engage in the

recesses in the reflector.

9. Engage the bulb holder.

10. Reposition the headlight cover and turn

it clockwise.

11. After changing the bulb on the left,

insert and engage filler neck for

windscreen wash system bottle, see

page 249.

Main beam

1. Open bonnet.

2. To change the bulb on the left, remove

filler neck from windscreen wash system

bottle, see page 249. As the headlight

has to be removed, have the bulb on the

right changed by a workshop.

3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise

and remove.

4. Detach plug connector from bulb.

252 Self-help, vehicle care

5. Press spring wire clip forward, disengage

to the right and open.

6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.

7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the

lugs in the recesses on the reflector

without touching the glass.

8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector

onto bulb.

9. Reposition the headlight cover and turn

it clockwise.

10. After changing the bulb on the left,

insert and engage filler neck for

windscreen wash system bottle, see

page 249.

Xenon headlight system, dipped

and main beam

Headlights with separate systems for main

beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2

(outer bulbs).

Dipped beam

9 Warning

The dipped beam works with very high

electrical voltage. Do not touch, risk of

fatal injury. Have bulbs changed by a

workshop.

253Self-help, vehicle care

Main beam

1. Open bonnet.

2. To change the bulb on the left, remove

filler neck from windscreen wash system

bottle, see page 249. As the headlight

has to be removed, have the bulb on the

right changed by a workshop.

3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise

and remove.

4. Detach plug connector from bulb.

5. Press spring wire clip forward, disengage

to the right and open.

6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.

7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the

lugs in the recesses on the reflector

without touching the glass.

8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector

onto bulb.

9. Reposition the headlight cover and turn

it clockwise.

10. After changing the bulb on the left,

insert and engage filler neck for

windscreen wash system bottle, see

page 249.

254 Self-help, vehicle care

Adaptive Forward Lighting

system 3

Xenon headlight system for main and

dipped beam together with curve

illumination based on steering angle.

Halogen headlight system, Xenon

headlight system,

parking lights

1. Open bonnet.

2. To change the bulb on the left, remove

filler neck from windscreen wash system

bottle, see page 249. As the headlight

has to be removed, have the bulb on the

right changed by a workshop.

3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise

and remove.

4. Remove parking light bulb holder from

reflector.

9 Warning

Xenon headlights operate at very high

voltage. Do not touch, risk of fatal injury.

Only have bulbs for dipped beam, main

beam, turn lighting, parking lights and

indicators changed by a workshop.

255Self-help, vehicle care

5. Remove bulb from socket.

6. Insert new bulb, without touching the

glass.

7. Insert socket in reflector, position

headlight cover and turn clockwise.

8. After changing the bulb on the left, insert

and engage filler neck for windscreen

wash system bottle, see page 249.

Halogen headlight system, Xenon

headlight system,

front indicator lights

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

Side turn signal lights

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

Fog lights 3

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

Tail lights

1. To open the storage compartment, push

both bars down. Also remove flap

behind storage compartment by

pushing the lugs.

256 Self-help, vehicle care

2. Hold bulb housing from outside,

slacken fastening nuts using wheel bolt

spanner 3 and unscrew by hand.

Remove bulb housing to rear. Wheel bolt

spanner 3 – see vehicle tools, page 235.

3. Detach cable plug from bulb housing. 4. Press the retaining lugs on the outer

edges of the bulb holder towards each

other. Remove the bulb holder.

257Self-help, vehicle care

Bulbs in bulb carrier

5. Remove bulb from socket.

6. Insert new bulb, do not touch the glass.

Engage light holder in light housing.

Engage cable plug. Insert light housing

into body and tighten fastening nuts by

hand. Close cover and storage

compartment.

Number plate light

1. Open luggage compartment.

2. Unscrew both screws on underside of

tailgate handle. Remove light insert.

1 = Reversing light

2 = Turn signal light

3 =Rear fog light

4 = Tail light

5 = Tail light/brake light

258 Self-help, vehicle care

3. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip

and remove.

4. Insert new bulb, without touching the

glass.

5. Insert light insert and secure using a

screwdriver.

Courtesy light

Front courtesy light, reading lights 3

To ensure that no power is supplied to the

lights, close the doors before removing.

1. Lever the lens out of the housing

recesses.

2. Remove bulb from socket.

3. Insert new bulb without touching the

glass with your hands.

4. Mount lens and engage in position.

Rear courtesy lights 3,

rear reading lights 3

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

259Self-help, vehicle care

Glove compartment lighting,

luggage compartment lighting,

foot well lighting 3

To ensure that no power is supplied to the

lights, close the doors or hold the contact

switch depressed before removing.

1. Prise the light out with a screwdriver.

2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip

and remove.

3. Insert new bulb, without touching the

glass.

4. Insert light in opening and engage in

position.

Instrument illumination,

information display illumination 3

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

260 Self-help, vehicle care

Vehicle care

When caring for your vehicle, observe all

national environmental regulations,

particularly when washing it.

Regular, thorough care helps to improve

the appearance of your vehicle and

maintain its value over the years. It is also

prerequisite for warranty claims for any

paint or corrosion damage. The following

pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if

used properly, will help combat the

unavoidable damaging effects of the

environment.

Vehicle care aids 3

Vehicle wash:

z Wash brush

z Shampoo

z Sponge

z Insect Removal Sponge

z Chamois

Vehicle care:

z Paintwork Cleaner

z Paintwork Polish

z Cream Polish

z Metallic Paintwork Wax

z Hard wax

z Touch-up pens,

z Touch-Up/Aerosol Paint

z Wheel Preserver

z Insect Remover

z Window Cleaner

z Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent

z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals

z Cleaner

Washing

The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to

environmental influences, e.g. continuous

changes in weather conditions, industrial

waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so

wash and wax your vehicle regularly. When

using automatic car washes, select a

program which includes waxing.

Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen

and the like should be cleaned off

immediately, as they contain aggressive

constituents which can cause paint

damage.

Please follow the wash system

manufacturer’s instructions when using

wash systems. The windscreen wipers and

the automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 and

the rear window wiper 3 must be switched

off, see pages 11, 126. Unscrew the

antenna rod 3 and the roof rack 3,

standing on the door sill to make them

easier to reach.

If you wash your vehicle by hand, make

sure that the insides of the wings are also

thoroughly rinsed out.

261Self-help, vehicle care

Clean edges and folds on opened doors

and flaps as well as the areas they cover.

Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the

vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use

separate leathers for paint and window

surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows

will impair vision.

Observe national regulations.

Waxing

Wax your vehicle regularly, in particular

after it has been washed using shampoo

and at the latest when water no longer

forms beads on the paintwork, otherwise

the paintwork will dry out.

Also wax edges and folds on opened doors

and flaps as well as the areas they cover.

Polishing

Polishing is necessary only if the paint has

become dull or if solid deposits have

become attached to it.

Paintwork polish with silicone forms a

protective film, making waxing

unnecessary.

Plastic body parts should not be treated

with wax and polish.

Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehicles

with a metallic-effect paint finish.

Wheels

Use a pH-neutral wheel cleaning agent to

clean the wheels.

Wheels are painted and can be treated

with the same agents as the body. For alloy

wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel

Preserver.

Paintwork damage

Repair minor paintwork damage such as

stone chips, scratches etc. immediately

using the touch-up pen or touch-up/

aerosol paint before rust forms. If rust has

already formed, have a workshop

eliminate the cause. Also check the

surfaces and edges facing the road surface

on which rust may have developed for

some time unnoticed.

Exterior lights

Headlight and other protective light bezels

are made of plastic. If they require

additional cleaning after the vehicle has

been washed, clean them with Car

Shampoo. Do not use any abrasive or

caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper,

and do not clean them dry.

262 Self-help, vehicle care

Plastic and rubber parts

For additional cleaning of plastic and

rubber parts use Cleaner. Do not use any

other agent, and in particular do not use

solvents or petrol.

Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.

Wheels and tyres

Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.

Interior and upholstery

Clean the vehicle interior, including the

instrument panel fascia, using interior

cleaner.

The instrument panel should only be

cleaned using a soft damp cloth.

Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum

cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use

cleaner that is suitable for both fabrics and

vinyl.

Do not use cleaning agents such as

acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, paint

remover, nail varnish remover, washing

powder or bleach. Benzine is also

unsuitable. Open velcro fasteners on

clothing could damage seat upholstery.

Make sure that velcro fasteners are closed.

Seat belts

Always keep seat belts clean and dry.

Clean only with lukewarm water or Cleaner.

Windows

When cleaning the heated rear window,

make sure that the heating element on the

inside of the window is not damaged.

Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather

in conjunction with Window Cleaner and

Insect Remover.

Cleaning solvent and antifreeze is suitable

for de-icing windows.

For mechanical removal of ice, use a

commercially available sharp-edged ice

scraper. Press the scraper firmly against

the glass so that no dirt can get under it

and scratch the glass.

Windscreen wiper blades

Wax, such as that used in car washes, can

cause streaking on the windscreen when

the wipers are used.

Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with

a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen

Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary –

see page 273.

Locks

The locks are lubricated with a high-quality

locking cylinder grease in the factory. Only

use de-icer in urgent cases, since it has a

de-greasing effect and affects the

operation of the locks. Have the locks re-

greased in a workshop after using de-icer.

Engine compartment

Areas of the engine compartment that are

painted in the same colour as the vehicle

must be looked after like any other painted

surface.

It is advisable to wash the engine

compartment before and after winter and

preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and

brake fluid reservoir with plastic sheets

before washing the engine.

263Self-help, vehicle care

When washing the engine with a steam jet,

do not direct the jet at components of the

anti-lock braking system, the air

conditioning system, the climate control

system, the auxiliary heater or the belt

drive or its components.

Engine washing also removes subsequently

applied protective wax. Therefore after

washing, have a workshop protect the

engine, parts of the braking system in the

engine bay, axle elements with steering,

body elements and cavities, thoroughly

with protective wax.

An engine wash can be performed in the

spring in order to remove dirt that has

adhered to the engine compartment,

which may also have a high salt content.

Check protective wax layer and make good

if necessary.

Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.

Underbody

Your vehicle has a factory-applied PVC

undercoating in the wheel arches

(including the longitudinal members) which

provides permanent protection and needs

no special maintenance.

The surfaces of the vehicle underbody not

covered by PVC are provided a durable

protective wax coating in critical areas.

On vehicles which are washed frequently in

automatic car washes with underbody

washing facility, the protective wax

coating may be impaired by dirt-dissolving

additives, so check the underbody after

washing and have it waxed if necessary.

Before the start of the cold weather season,

check the PVC coating and protective wax

coating and, if necessary, have them

restored to perfect condition.

Caution - commercially available bitumen/

rubber materials can damage the PVC

coating. We recommend that you have

underbody work carried out by a workshop

which knows the prescribed materials and

has experience in the use thereof.

The underbody should be washed

following the end of the cold weather

season to remove any dirt adhering to the

underbody since this may also contain salt.

Check protective wax coating and, if

necessary, have it restored to perfect

condition.

264 Service plan, maintenance

Service plan,

maintenance

In our experience, the most common cause

of all complaints is the result of

misunderstanding or lack of

communication between the customer and

the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

We sincerely hope you will never have

cause to complain about your vehicle.

However, if things do go wrong, the best

course of action for you to take is to

contact your Vauxhall Authorised

Repairer’s Service Reception Staff and

explain the difficulty you are having. We

are confident they will do their utmost to

resolve the problem to your complete

satisfaction.

Sometimes, however, despite the best of

intentions of all concerned,

misunderstandings can occur. If your

problem has not been resolved to your

satisfaction, please make an appointment

to discuss the matter with the Manager of

the department concerned.

The majority of areas of concern can be

quickly resolved in this way.

Should you wish to pursue the matter

further, the Principal of the Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer should be made

aware of your concern. It is advisable in

cases such as this to write to him to confirm

your problem and the solutions that have

been offered.

You can be assured the Authorised

Repairer’s Principal will only be too anxious

to fully investigate your problems and

correct any errors made. After all, he has a

large investment in his business and is

proud of his reputation and

professionalism and fully realises that

satisfied customers are his key to success.

In the unlikely event that you are still not

happy with the answer your Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer has given, or the

action he proposes to correct the problem,

you may contact the Customer Care

Department

where a team of Customer

Care Consultants will spare no effort to

ensure your complete satisfaction.

Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

Customer Care,

Griffin House,

Osborne Road,

LUTON,

Beds., LU1 3YT

Telephone: 0845 090 2044

They will review all the facts involved. Then

if it is felt some further action can be taken,

the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be

advised accordingly. In any case, your

contact will be acknowledged confirming

Vauxhall Motors’ position in the matter.

If you are not satisfied with the outcome,

you can if you wish, seek advice from an

independent third party such as:

Automobile Association (A.A.)

Fanum House,

BASINGSTOKE,

Hants., RG21 2EA

Royal Automobile Club (R.A.C.),

R.A.C. Motoring Services Ltd.,

89-91 Pall Mall,

LONDON, SW1Y S45

The Customer Relations Department,

Society of Motor Manufacturers and

Traders Ltd. (S.M.M.T.),

Forbes House, Halkin Street,

LONDON, SW1X 7DS

Customer Complaints Service,

Scottish Motor Trade Association,

(S.M.T.A.),

3 Palmerston Place,

EDINBURGH, EH12 5AQ

Inspection system ................................ 266

Genuine Vauxhall Parts and

Accessories ........................................ 267

A note on safety .................................. 267

Checking and topping up fluids......... 267

Engine oil.............................................. 268

Diesel fuel filter .................................... 270

Coolant................................................. 270

Brake fluid ............................................ 272

Windscreen wiper ................................ 273

Windscreen and headlight wash

systems 3........................................... 275

Battery.................................................. 276

Protecting electronic components ..... 276

Calls may be monitored and recorded for

training purposes.

265Service plan, maintenance

The National Conciliation Service,

Retail Motor Industry Federation,

9 North Street,

RUGBY, CV21 2AB

If you have a problem whilst abroad:

The Service Departments of Adam Opel

GmbH and General Motors branches

everywhere will provide information and

assistance:

In Luxembourg please contact the

General Motors Service Department in

Antwerp – Belgium

Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 29

In Albania, Bosnia-Herzegovina,

Bulgaria, Croatia, Estonia,

Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia,

Romania, Serbia-Montenegro

and Slovenia please contact the

General Motors Service Department in

Budaörs – Hungary

Tel. 00 36-23 446 100

General Motors Austria GmbH

Groß-Enzersdorfer Str. 59

1220 Vienna – Austria

Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or

00 43-1-2 88 77 0

General Motors Belgium N.V.

Noorderlaan 401 – Haven 500

2030 Antwerp – Belgium

Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 29

General Motors Southeast Europe,

org. složka

Olbrachtova 9

140 00 Prague – Czech Republic

Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321

General Motors Danmark

Jaegersborg Alle 4

2920 Charlottenlund – Denmark

Tel. 00 45-39 97 85 00

General Motors Finland Oy

Pajuniityntie 5

00320 Helsinki – Finland

Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47

General Motors France

1 – 9, avenue du Marais

Angle Quai de Bezons

95101 Argenteuil Cedex – France

Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51

General Motors Hellas S.A.

56 Kifisias Avenue & Delfon str.

Amarousion

151 25 Athens – Greece

Telephone 00 30-1-6 80 65 01

ADAM OPEL GmbH

Bahnhofsplatz 1

65423 Rüsselsheim – Germany

Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or

00 49-61 42-7 70

General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd.

Szabadsag utca 117

2040 Budaörs – Hungary

Tel. 00 36-23 446 100

General Motors India

Sixth Floor, Tower A

Global Business Park

Mehrauli – Gurgaon Road

Gurgaon – 122 022, Haryana – India

Telephone 00 91-124 280 3333

General Motors Ireland Ltd.

Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road

Sandyford, Dublin 18 – Ireland

Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00

General Motors Italia Srl

Piazzale dell’Industria 40

00144 Rome – Italy

Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51

General Motors Nederland B.V.

Lage Mosten 49 – 63

4822 NK Breda – Netherlands

Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00

General Motors Norge AS

Kjeller-Vest 6

2027 Kjeller – Norway

Telephone 00 47-23 50 01 04

General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o.

Wołoska 5

06-675 Warsaw – Poland

Telephone 00 48-22-606 17 00

General Motors Portugal

Quinta da Fonte

Edificío Fernão Magalhães, Piso 2

2780-190 Paço d’Arcos – Portugal

Telephone 00 351-21 440 75 00

General Motors Southeast Europe,

org. zložka

Apollo Business Centre

Mlynské Nivy 45

821 09 Bratislava – Slovakia

Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543

General Motors España S.L.

Paseo de la Castellana, 91

28046 Madrid – Spain

Telephone 00 34-902 25 00 25

General Motors Norden AB

Årstaängvägen 17

100 73 Stockholm – Sweden

Tel. 00 46-20 333 000

General Motors Suisse S.A.

Stelzenstraße 4

8152 Glattbrugg – Switzerland

Telephone 00 41-44 828 28 80

General Motors Türkiye Ltd. Sti.

Kemalpasa yolu üzeri

35861 Torbalı/İzmir – Turkey

Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53

266 Service plan, maintenance

Inspection system

In order to guarantee economical and safe

vehicle operation and to maintain the

value of your vehicle, it is of vital

importance that all maintenance work is

carried out at the proper intervals.

For vehicles with strict engine oil change

and service intervals, before servicing is

due the display InSP appears on the

odometer after the ignition has been

switched on and off: Have your next service

carried out by a workshop within one week

or 300 miles (500 km).

The service interval display takes account

of off-the-road periods during which the

battery is disconnected.

For vehicles with flexible oil change and

service intervals, the length of these

intervals is based on several parameters

stemming from usage. For this reason,

various engine-specific data is continually

gathered and is used to calculate the

remaining distance until the next service.

The remaining distance can be seen in the

odometer display when the ignition is off:

Press the reset button next to the trip

odometer. InSP and the remaining distance

will be displayed.

If the remaining distance is less than

1000 miles (1500 km), InSP is displayed

with a remaining distance of 600 miles

(1000 km) when the ignition is switched on.

InSP is displayed for several seconds if the

remaining distance is less than 300 miles

(500 km). Have the service work that is due

carried out within one week or 300 miles

(500 km). Have this work carried out by a

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in order to

avoid invalidation of warranty claims.

Further information on maintenance and

the inspection system can be found in the

service booklet, which is in the glove

compartment.

Have maintenance work – and repair work

on the body and the equipment – carried

out professionally by a workshop. We

recommend using your Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer, who has excellent

knowledge of Vauxhall vehicles and has

the necessary special tools and up-to-date

service instructions from Vauxhall. It is

particularly advisable to use a Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer during the warranty

period in order to prevent loss of warranty.

Further information can be found in the

Service Booklet.

Separate anti-corrosion service

Have this work carried out according to the

intervals specified in the service booklet.

267Service plan, maintenance

Genuine Vauxhall Parts and

Accessories

We recommend that you use "Genuine

Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and

conversion parts approved expressly for

your vehicle type. These parts have

undergone special tests to establish their

reliability, safety and specific suitability for

Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous

market monitoring, we cannot assess or

guarantee these –attributes for other

products, even if they have been granted

approval by the relevant authorities –or in

some other form.

"Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories"

and conversion parts approved by

Vauxhall can be obtained from your

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can

provide expert advice on permitted

technical changes and ensure correct

installation.

A note on safety

To avoid injury from moving parts and

cables conducting ignition voltage, only

carry out engine compartment checks

(e. g. checking brake fluid or engine oil

level) when the ignition is switched off.

Never carry out any repairs or adjustment

and maintenance work on the vehicle

yourself. This especially applies to the

engine, chassis and safety parts. You may

unwittingly infringe the provisions of the

law and, by not performing the work

properly, endanger yourself and other

road users.

Checking and topping up fluids

To aid identification, the caps used when

topping up engine oil, coolant and wash

fluid as well as the oil dipstick handle may

be coloured yellow.

9 Warning

The cooling fan is controlled by a

thermoswitch and can therefore start

unexpectedly even if the ignition is

switched off. Risk of injury.

Electronic ignition systems generate very

high voltages. Do not touch the ignition

system; high voltage can be fatal.

268 Service plan, maintenance

Engine oil

Information on engine oils is found in the

Service Booklet.

Engine oil level and consumption

Every engine consumes engine oil for

technical reasons. The engine oil

consumption cannot be assessed until a

fairly long distance has been driven, and

may be above the specified value when the

vehicle is first being driven (run-in period).

Frequent driving at high revs increases

engine oil consumption.

In vehicles with engine oil level

monitoring 3, the engine oil level is

monitored automatically, see page 103. It

is advisable to check the oil level before

setting out on long journeys.

Engine oil level check, topping up

engine oil

The figures on this page show examples of

the checks for various petrol and diesel

engines. Fig. 17780 J on the next page

shows the checks for engine Z 30 DT

The oil level must be checked with the

vehicle on a level surface and with the

engine (which must be at operating

temperature) switched off. Wait at least

5 minutes before checking the level to

allow the normal engine oil accumulation

in the engine to drain into the oil pan.

9 Warning

It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain

the proper level of an appropriate quality

oil in the engine.

Sales designation – see page 281.

269Service plan, maintenance

To check the engine oil level, insert wiped

oil dipstick into handle as far as it will go.

Top engine oil up if the level has dropped

into the range of the top-up mark MIN.

The engine oil level must not exceed the

upper mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess

engine oil must be drained off or extracted.

If the engine oil level is above the MAX

mark there is a risk of damage to the

engine or the catalytic converter.

The amount filled must be between

the MIN and MAX marks – see page 294.

Top up with the same brand of engine oil

that was used during the previous oil

change, following the instructions in the

service booklet.

To close, position the cap and screw it into

place.

Capacities – see page 294.

Engine oil change, oil filter change

Change oil at a workshop according to the

service interval shown on the display.

We recommend that you use genuine

engine oil filters.

9 Warning

Waste engine oil cannot be disposed of

with domestic refuse. Observe the legal

requirements for disposal of old oil and

filters to protect of the environment and

your health.

270 Service plan, maintenance

Diesel fuel filter

On each engine oil change, have the fuel

filter checked for any water residue by a

workshop.

For engines

Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL and

Z 19 DTH, control indicator

A illuminates

if there is water in the diesel fuel filter.

Have fuel filter checked at shorter intervals

if the vehicle is subjected to extreme

operating conditions such as high humidity

(primarily in coastal areas), extremely high

or low outside temperatures and

substantially varying daytime and night-

time temperatures.

Coolant

The –glycol-based – coolant provides

excellent corrosion protection for the

heating and cooling systems as well as

antifreeze protection down to approx.

-28 °C. It remains in the cooling system

throughout the year and need not be

changed.

Use of certain antifreezes can lead to

engine damage. We therefore recommend

that you use only approved antifreezes.

Antifreeze and corrosion protection

Before the start of winter, have a workshop

check the antifreeze protection. The

antifreeze level must guarantee protection

to approx. -28 °C. Insufficient antifreeze

will reduce the frost protection level and

the corrosion protection. If necessary add

antifreeze.

If coolant loss is topped up with water,

have concentration checked and add

antifreeze if necessary.

Sales designation – see page 281.

9 Warning

Antifreeze is a danger to health; it must

therefore be kept in the original container

and out of the reach of children.

271Service plan, maintenance

Coolant level

Hardly any losses occur since the cooling

system is sealed and it is thus rarely

necessary to top up the coolant.

4-cylinder petrol and diesel engines: When

the cooling system is cold, the coolant level

in the expansion tank should be slightly

above the KALT/COLD mark. Coolant level

can be read off from the outside of the

expansion tank.

For V6 petrol and diesel engines, the

expansion tank must be opened in order to

check coolant level. When the cooling

system is cold, the coolant should be up to

the COLD mark on the filler opening.

When the engine is at operating

temperature, coolant level rises. It falls

again when the system cools. If it falls

below the KALT/COLD mark when the

system is cold, top up to the mark.

Top up antifreeze. If no antifreeze is

available, top up with clean tap water.

If tap water is unavailable, distilled water

can be used.

After filling with drinking water or distilled

water, measure the antifreeze

concentration and add antifreeze if

required. Have a workshop establish the

cause of the coolant loss.

Too low a coolant level can cause engine

damage.

To close, position the cap and screw it into

place.

9 Warning

Allow engine to cool down before

removing coolant filler cap. Remove filler

cap carefully so that pressure can escape

slowly, otherwise there is a risk of

scalding.

272 Service plan, maintenance

Coolant temperature

If the temperature gauge enters the right-

hand (warning) zone or control indicator W

illuminates, check the coolant level

immediately.

z Coolant level too low:

Top up coolant, noting the instructions

given under "Antifreeze and corrosion

protection" and "Coolant level". Have

the cause of the coolant loss rectified by

a workshop.

z Coolant level OK:

Have the cause of the elevated coolant

temperature rectified. Contact a

workshop.

Brake fluid

Brake fluid level

The fluid level in the reservoir must be

neither higher than the MAX mark nor

lower than the MIN mark.

Use of certain brake fluids can lead to

damage or reduced braking effect. We

therefore recommend that you use only

high performance approved brake fluid.

Extreme cleanliness is needed when

topping up, since contamination in the

brake fluid can cause brake system

malfunctions.

After correcting the brake fluid level, have

a workshop eliminate the cause of the

brake fluid loss.

9 Warning

Brake fluid is poisonous and corrosive. Do

not allow it to come into contact with

eyes, skin, fabric or painted surfaces.

Direct contact could cause injury and

damage.

273Service plan, maintenance

Brake fluid change

Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs

water. If the brakes become hot, such as

when driving on long downhill stretches,

vapour bubbles can occur in the water,

which can have an extremely adverse

effect on braking power (depending on the

proportion of water).

The fluid change intervals specified in the

Service Booklet must therefore be

observed.

Windscreen wiper

Clear vision is essential for safe driving.

Perform regular checks on the windscreen

wiper and headlight wash system 3 to

ensure they are operating correctly. We

recommend wiper blade replacement at

least once a year.

If the windscreen is dirty, operate the

windscreen wash system before switching

the windscreen wiper on or setting the

wiper to automatic operation with the rain

sensor 3. This will avoid wiper blade wear.

Do not switch on the windscreen wiper or

set them to automatic operation with the

rain sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up as

this could damage the wiper blades or the

wiper system.

If the wiper becomes frozen on to the glass,

we recommend that they be released with

the aid of De-icer Spray.

Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with

a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen

Wash Solvent.

Wiper blades whose lips have become

hardened, cracked or covered with silicone

must be replaced. This may be necessary

as a result of the effects of ice, thawing salt

or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning

agents.

Switch off the windscreen wipers or

automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 in car

washes, see pages 12, 260.

Windscreen wiper blade maintenance, see

page 262.

9 Warning

Have the brake fluid changed by a

workshop. Observe the legal

requirements for disposal of brake fluid

to protect of the environment and your

health.

274 Service plan, maintenance

To ensure proper operation of the rain

sensor 3, the sensor area must be free from

dust, dirt and ice. The windscreen wash

system must also be operated at regular

intervals and the sensor area must be de-

iced. Vehicles with rain sensor 3 can be

identified by the sensor area near the top

of the windscreen.

Service setting for front windscreen

wipers

(e.g. for changing or cleaning the front

wiper blades).

Within 8 seconds of switching off the

engine but with the key in the ignition

switch, press the windscreen wiper stalk

downward. Release the stalk as soon as the

wiper blades are vertical.

Wiper blades on the windscreen

Activating service position, see preceding

column. Lift wiper arm. Press the release

lever and detach the wiper blade.

275Service plan, maintenance

Windscreen and headlight wash

systems 3

The filler neck of the windscreen washing

system and headlight washing system

bottle 3 is at the front left of the engine

compartment next to the battery. The fluid

level in the reservoir can be read off from

the level indicator. Do not fill above

Capacities – see page 294.

Fill only with clean water to prevent the

nozzles from clogging. To improve

cleaning efficiency, we recommend that

you add a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash

Solvent.

The windscreen wash system and

headlight wash system will not freeze in

winter:

When closing the reservoir, press the lid

firmly over the beaded edge all the way

round.

Frost protection

down to

Mixture ratio of

Vauxhall

Windscreen

Wash Solvent to

Water

- 5 °C 1 : 3

- 10 °C 1 : 2

- 20 °C 1 : 1

- 30 °C 2 : 1

276 Service plan, maintenance

Battery

The battery is maintenance-free.

Retrofitting of electrical or electronic

accessories can discharge or add extra

load to the battery. Take advice on the

technical possibilities, e.g. use of a more

powerful battery.

Laying up the vehicle for more than

4 weeks can lead to battery discharge,

which may reduce the service life of the

battery. Disconnect battery from on-board

power supply by detaching negative

terminal (Vauxhall alarm system 3 is then

disabled).

Ensure that ignition is switched off before

connecting battery. Then perform the

following actions:

z Setting date and time in the information

display – see pages 110, 113, 118.

z Activate window and sun roof

electronics 3 if necessary – see

pages 44, 47.

In order to prevent the battery from

discharging, some consumers such as the

courtesy light automatically switch off

after approx. 20 minutes.

Disconnecting/connecting the battery

from/to the electrical system

Disconnect battery from vehicle power

supply before charging: disconnect

negative cable first, then the positive

cable.

The polarity of the battery, i.e. the positive

and negative terminal connections, must

not be switched. Always connect the

positive cable first, then the negative

cable.

Protecting electronic components

In order to prevent faults in electronic

components in the electrical system, never

connect or disconnect battery with engine

running or ignition switched on. Never start

engine with battery disconnected, e.g.

when starting using jump leads.

To avoid damaging the vehicle, do not

make any modifications to the electrical

system, e.g. connecting additional

consumers or tampering with electronic

control units (chip tuning).

9 Warning

Have the battery changed by a

workshop. Observe the legal

requirements for disposal of old batteries

to protect of the environment and your

health.

9 Warning

Electronic ignition systems generate very

high voltages. Do not touch the ignition

system; high voltage can be fatal.

277Service plan, maintenance

Vehicle decommissioning

Observe national regulations.

If the vehicle is to be parked for several

months, to avoid damage have the

following work performed by a workshop.

z Wash and preserve the vehicle

– see page 260.

z Check corrosion protection in engine

compartment and on underbody and

repair if necessary.

z Clean and preserve rubber seals on

bonnet and doors.

z Change engine oil – see page 269.

z Check antifreeze and corrosion

protection – see page 270.

z Check the coolant level, top up with

antifreeze if necessary – see page 271.

z Empty windscreen wash system and

headlight wash system.

z Increase tyre pressure to value specified

for full load – see page 288.

Vehicle storage

z Park vehicle in dry, well ventilated place.

With manual transmission or

Easytronic 3, engage 1st or reverse

gear. With automatic transmission 3,

selector lever in P. Use chocks or the

like to prevent the vehicle from rolling.

z Do not apply hand brake.

z Disconnect battery by disengaging

negative terminal from vehicle electrical

system – see page 276.

Vehicle recommissioning

Observe national regulations.

Perform the following work before

recommissioning the vehicle:

z Connect battery – see page 276.

z Check tyre pressure and correct if

necessary – see page 288.

z Fill up windscreen wash system

– see page 275.

z Check engine oil level – see page 268.

z Check the coolant level; top up with

antifreeze if necessary – see page 271.

z Fit number plates if necessary.

278 Technical data

Technical data

Vehicle documents, identification

plate

The technical data is determined in

accordance with European Community

standards. We reserve the right to make

modifications. Specifications in the vehicle

documents always have priority over those

given in this manual.

The identification plate is affixed to the

front right door frame.

Information on identification plate:

Vehicle documents, identification

plate................................................... 278

Vehicle identification data.................. 279

Coolant, brake fluid, oils ..................... 279

Engine data.......................................... 280

Performance......................................... 282

Fuel consumption, CO

emissions ......

283

Weights, payload and roof load ........ 285

Tyres ..................................................... 288

Electrical system .................................. 293

Capacities ............................................ 294

Dimensions ........................................... 296

Installation dimensions of trailer

towing equipment............................. 297

1 Manufacturer

2 Type approval number

3 Vehicle identification number

4 Gross vehicle weight rating

5 Permissible gross train weight

6 Maximum permissible front axle load

7 Maximum permissible rear axle load

8 Vehicle-specific or country-specific

data

279Technical data

Vehicle identification data

The vehicle identification number is

stamped on the identification plate and

beneath a cover on the floor of the vehicle

between the front door and seat on the

right-hand side.

In other design variants, the identification

plate may also be affixed to the

dashboard.

Engine code and engine number: stamped

on left-hand side of engine on crankcase.

Coolant, brake fluid, oils

Only use approved fluids.

Use of unsuitable fluids can cause serious

damage to the vehicle.

Engine oils

Information on engine oils is found in the

Service Booklet.

280 Technical data

Engine data

Sales designation

Engine identifier code

1.8

Z 18 XE

1.8

Z 18 XER

2.0 Turbo

Z 20 NET

2.2 DIRECT

Z 22 YH

2.8 V6

Z 28 NEL

2.8 V6

Z 28 NET

Number of cylinders 444466

Piston displacement (cm

) 1796 1796 1998 2198 2792 2792

Brake horse power (kW/bhp)

at rpm

6000

103

6300

129

5500

114

5600

169

5500

184

5500

Torque (Nm)

at rpm

167

3800

175

3800

265

2500 to 3800

220

3800

330

1800 to 4500

350

1800 to 4500

Type of fuel Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol

Octane requirement (RON)

unleaded

or unleaded

Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228, value printed in bold: recommended fuel.

2)3)

Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number).

Slight reduction in engine output and torque if 91 RON is used.

2)3)

2)4)

If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous terrain with

a caravan/trailer load or high payload.

–

The use of fuel that is at least 95 RON is prescribed.

91 octane fuel must not be used.

2)3)

Max. permissible engine speed,

continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6500 6500 6200 6500 6700 6700

Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

281Technical data

Engine data

Sales designation

Engine identifier code

1.9 CDTI

Z 19 DTL

1.9 CDTI

Z 19 DT

1.9 CDTI

Z 19 DTH

3.0 CDTI

Z 30 DT

Number of cylinders 4446

Piston displacement (cm

) 1910 1910 1910 2958

Brake horse power (kW/bhp)

at rpm

3500

3500 to 4000

110

4000

135

4000

Torque (Nm)

at rpm

260

1700 to 2500

280

2000 to 2750

320

2000 to 2750

400

1900 to 2700

Type of fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Cetane requirement (CN)

Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. Diesel DIN EN 590, value printed in bold: recommended fuel.

A lower value is possible with winter fuels.

Max. permissible engine speed,

continuous operation (rpm) approx. 5100 5100 5100 5000

Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

282 Technical data

Performance

(approx. mph/km/h)

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 280, 281.

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET

Maximum speed

Manual transmission

Sports transmission

Easytronic

Automatic transmission

The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified

maximum speed of the vehicle.

–

122/197

–

125/201

129/207

–

138/222

–

130/210

–

128/206

151/243

–

151/243

155/250

–

155/250

The maximum speed is limited electronically.

Engine

Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Maximum speed

Manual transmission

Sports transmission

Easytronic

Automatic transmission

112/180

–

120/193

–

130/210

–

127/205

139/224

–

136/219

283Technical data

Fuel consumption, CO

emissions

Directive 80/1268/EEC (last changed

by 2004/3/EC) has applied for the

measurement of fuel consumption

since 1996.

The directive is oriented to actual driving

practices: Urban driving is rated at

approx.

and off-road driving with

approx.

(urban and extra-urban

consumption). Cold starts and acceleration

phases are also taken into consideration.

The specification of CO

emission is also a

constituent of the directive.

The figures given must not be taken as a

guarantee for the actual fuel consumption

of a particular vehicle.

All values are based on the EU base model

with standard equipment.

The calculation of fuel consumption as

specified by directive 2004/3/EC takes

account of the vehicle’s kerb weight,

ascertained in accordance with these

regulations. Optional extras may result in

slightly higher fuel consumption and CO

emission levels than those quoted.

To convert l/100 km into mpg, divide 282

by the number of litres/100km.

Saving fuel, protecting the environment

– see page 186.

284 Technical data

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO

emissions (approx. g/km) (tyre width up to 225 mm)

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 280, 281.

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

–/11.0/–/–

–/ 6.1/–/–

–/ 7.9/–/–

–/ 190/–/–

10.3/10.4/10.0/–

5.9/ 6.1/ 5.7/–

7.5/ 7.7/ 7.3/–

180/ 185/ 175/–

–/12.8/–/–

–/ 6.6/–/–

–/ 8.9/–/–

–/ 214/–/–

10.9/10.9/–/11.6

6.6/ 6.5/–/ 6.4

8.2/ 8.1/–/ 8.3

197/ 194/–/ 199

15.7/–/–/17.4

7.6/–/–/ 7.6

10.6/–/–/11.2

254/–/–/ 269

15.7/–/–/17.4

7.6/–/–/ 7.6

10.6/–/–/11.2

254/–/–/ 269

Engine

Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

7.6/–/–/–

4.9/–/–/–

5.9/–/–/–

159/–/–/–

7.6/–/–/–

4.9/–/–/–

5.9/–/–/–

159/–/–/–

7,6/–/–/ 9,6

4,9/–/–/ 5,5

5,9/–/–/ 7,0

159/–/–/189

9.9/–/–/10.3

5.3/–/–/ 5.4

7.0/–/–/ 7.2

189/–/–/ 194

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO

emissions (approx. g/km), (tyre width up to 235 mm)

Engine

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

–/11.1/–/–

–/ 6.2/–/–

–/ 8.0/–/–

–/ 192/–/–

10.4/10.5/10.1/–

6.0/ 6.2/ 5.8/–

7.6/ 7.8/ 7.4/–

182/ 187/ 178/–

–/12.9/–/–

–/ 6.7/–/–

–/ 9.0/–/–

–/ 216/–/–

11.0/11.0/–/11.7

6.7/ 6.6/–/ 6.5

8.3/ 8.2/–/ 8.4

199/ 197/–/ 202

15.8/–/–/17.5

7.7/–/–/ 7.7

10.7/–/–/11.3

257/–/–/ 271

15.8/–/–/17.5

7.7/–/–/ 7.7

10.7/–/–/11.3

257/–/–/ 271

Engine

Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic

transmission

urban

extra-urban

total

7.7/–/–/–

5.0/–/–/–

6.0/–/–/–

162/–/–/–

7.7/–/–/–

5.0/–/–/–

6.0/–/–/–

162/–/–/–

7,7/–/–/ 9,7

5,0/–/–/ 5,6

6,0/–/–/ 7,1

162/–/–/192

10.0/–/–/10.4

5.4/–/–/ 5.5

7.1/–/–/ 7.3

192/–/–/ 197

285Technical data

Weights, payload and roof load

The payload is the difference between the

permitted gross vehicle weight (see

identification plate, page 278) and the EC

kerb weight.

To calculate the kerb weight, enter the

data for your vehicle below:

is the EC kerb weight.

Optional equipment and accessories

increase the kerb weight, which means that

the payload will also change slightly.

Pay attention to weight ranges in vehicle

documents and on identification plate.

The combined total of front and rear axle

loads must not exceed the permissible

gross vehicle weight. For example, if the

front axle is bearing its maximum

permissible load, the rear axle can only

bear a load that is equal to the gross

vehicle weight minus the front axle load.

Maximum rear axle load must not be

exceeded with trailer attached and towing

vehicle fully loaded, including all

occupants.

See the identification plate or vehicle

documents for permissible axle loads.

Roof load

The permissible roof load is 100 kg. The

roof load consists of the weight of the roof

rack plus the load carried.

Driving hints – see page 184.

Roof rack – see page 218.

z Kerb weight from

table 1,

page 286 + .............. kg

z Additional weight of

equipment versions

from table 2,

page 287 + .............. kg

z Weight of heavy

accessories from table 3,

page 287 + .............. kg

Total = .............. kg

286 Technical data

Weights (kg), Table 1, kerb weight

According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).

Sales designation – see pages 280, 281.

Model Engine

Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission

Signum with air

conditioning system or

climate control system

Z 18 XE 1495 – –

Z 18 XER 1495 1495 –

Z 20 NET 1575 – –

Z 22 YH 1550 – 1580

Z 28 NEL 1650 – 1675

Z 28 NET 1650 – 1675

Z 19 DTL 1605 – –

Z 19 DT 1605 – –

Z 19 DTH 1613 – 1638

Z 30 DT 1715 – 1733

287Technical data

Weights (kg), Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 280, 281.

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 19 DTL,

Z 19 DT

Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Elegance 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

Exclusiv, Elite242424242424242424

Design 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19

Weights (kg), Table 3, Heavy accessories

Accessories Sun roof Towing equipment

Weight 13 24

288 Technical data

Tyres

Not all tyres available on the market

currently meet the structural requirements.

We recommend that you consult a

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning

suitable tyre makes.

These tyres have undergone special tests

to establish their reliability, safety and

specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles.

Despite continuous market monitoring, we

are unable to assess these attributes for

other tyres, even if they have been granted

approval by the relevant authorities or in

some other form.

Further information – see page 211.

Winter tyres 3

Tyres of size 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 and

235/35 R 19 are not to be used as winter

tyres.

Only the winter tyres specified on page 292

may be used on vehicles factory-fitted with

235/35 R 19 tyres.

Fitting the temporary spare when winter

tyres are in use: using a temporary spare

wheel may change the driving behaviour of

the vehicle. Replace defective tyre as

quickly as possible, balance wheel and fit

to vehicle.

Further information – see page 211.

Tyre chains 3

Tyre chains may be used on the front

wheels only.

We recommend the use of fine-link snow

chains which amount to max 10 mm on the

tread and tyre inner wall with chain lock

Tyre chains are not permitted on tyre sizes

115/70 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 and

235/35 R 19.

Further information – see page 211.

Wheels

Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm.

Spare wheel 3

The spare wheel is intended as a

temporary spare: using a temporary spare

wheel may change the driving behaviour of

the vehicle. Replace defective tyre as

quickly as possible, balance wheel and fit

to vehicle.

Tyre pressure in psi/bar

The specified tyre pressures are valid for

cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure

resulting from extensive driving must not

be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on

the following pages apply to both summer

and winter tyres.

Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure 3 –

see tables on the following pages.

In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring

system 3 there is an adapter in the valve

cap key. Screw adapter to valve before

attaching tyre pressure gauge – see

page 213.

Further information – see pages 211 to 217.

289Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/bar

Tyre pressure

for load of up to

4people

Tyre pressure

ECO

loaded with

up to 4 people

Tyre pressure for

full load

Engine

Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER

195/65 R 15

205/55 R 16,

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

29/2.0 32/2.2 35/2.4 38/2.6 32/2.2 39/2.7

Z 20 NET 205/55 R 16

35/2.4 35/2.4 – – 38/2.6 45/3.1

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 36/2.5 44/3.0

Z 22 YH 195/65 R 15

205/55 R 16

33/2.3 33/2.3 – – 35/2.4 42/2.9

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 32/2.2 39/2.7

all T 115/70 R 16

(temporary spare)

61/4.2 61/4.2 – – 61/4.2 61/4.2

To reduce fuel consumption as much as possible.

Sales designation – see pages 280, 281.

Only permitted as winter tyres.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 234.

290 Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/bar

Tyre pressure

for load of up to

4people

Tyre pressure for full

load

Engine

Tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Z 28 NEL,

Z 28 NET

215/55 R 16

36/2.5 33/2.3 39/2.7 46/3.2

215/50 R 17

225/45 R 17

225/45 R 18

39/2.7 35/2.4 42/2.9 49/3.4

215/55 R 16

38/2.6 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3

215/50 R 17

225/45 R 17

225/45 R 18

41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5

all T 115/70 R 16

(temporary spare)

61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2

Sales designation – see pages 280, 281.

Version with manual transmission.

Version with automatic transmission.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 217.

291Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/bar

Tyre pressure

for load of up to

4people

Tyre pressure

ECO

loaded with

up to 4 people

Tyre pressure for

full load

Engine

Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear

Z 19 DT 195/65 R 15

205/55 R 16

33/2.3 33/2.3 – – 35/2.4 42/2.9

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

32/2.2 32/2.2 36/2.5 36/2.5 32/2.2 39/2.7

Z 19 DTL,

Z 19 DTH

195/65 R 15

205/55 R 16

35/2.4 35/2.4 – – 38/2.6 45/3.1

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

33/2.3 33/2.3 38/2.6 38/2.6 36/2.5 44/3.0

Z 30 DT 215/55 R 16 36/2.5 33/2.3 – – 39/2.7 46/3.2

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 18

38/2.6 35/2.4 – – 41/2.8 48/3.3

225/45 R 17 39/2.7 35/2.4 – – 42/2.9 49/3.4

all T 115/70 R 16

(temporary spare)

61/4.2 61/4.2 – – 61/4.2 61/4.2

To reduce fuel consumption as much as possible.

Sales designation – see pages 280, 281.

Only permitted as winter tyres.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 234.

292 Technical data

(ctd.)

Tyre pressure in psi/bar

Vehicles with 19-inch wheels Tyre pressure

for load of up to

4people

Tyre pressure for full

load

Engine

Tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER,

Z 22 YH

235/35 R 19 39/2.7 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

205/50 R 17

33/2.3 33/2.3 36/2.5 44/3.0

Z 20 NET,

Z 19 DTL,

Z 19 DTH

235/35 R 19 39/2.7 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

33/2.3 33/2.3 36/2.5 44/3.0

205/50 R 17

39/2.7 35/2.4 41/2.8 48/3.3

Z 28 NEL,

Z 28 NET

235/35 R 19 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

41/2.8 36/2.5 44/3.0 51/3.5

205/50 R 17

42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5

Z 30 DT 235/35 R 19 42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 51/3.5

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

39/2.7 36/2.5 42/2.9 49/3.4

205/50 R 17

42/2.9 38/2.6 45/3.1 54/3.5

all T 115/70 R 16

61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2 61/4.2

Sales designation, see pages 280, 281.

Only permitted as winter tyres.

For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 234.

293Technical data

Electrical system

Battery Voltage 12 Volt

Amp hours 55 Ah / 60 Ah 3 / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 /

72 Ah 3 / 85 Ah 3

Battery for remote control of central

locking system CR 20 32

Battery for remote control of the auxiliary

heating/auxiliary ventilation AAA LR 03

294 Technical data

Capacities

(approx. litre)

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 280, 281.

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET

Fuel tank (nominal content) 60 60 60 60 60 60

Engine oil with filter change

between MIN and MAX on dipstick

4.25

1.0

4.5

1.0

6.0

1.0

5.0

1.0

6.0

1.0

6.0

1.0

Windscreen wash reservoir

with headlight wash system

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

295Technical data

Capacities

(approx. litre)

Engine

Sales designation – see pages 280, 281.

Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT

Fuel tank (nominal content) 60 60 60 60

Engine oil with filter change

between MIN and MAX on dipstick

4.3

1.0

4.3

1.0

4.3

1.0

7.5

1.0

Windscreen wash reservoir

with headlight wash system

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

2.9

5.6

296 Technical data

Dimensions

(approx. mm)

Signum

Overall length 4651

Version with body kit.

Overall width 1798

Width with two exterior mirrors 2036

Overall height

At kerb weight with driver.

1466

Length of luggage compartment

floor

929

Luggage compartment width

maximum

between the wheel arches

1054

978

Height of luggage compartment

opening

727

Wheelbase 2830

Turning circle diameter

In metres.

11.92

297Technical data

Installation dimensions of trailer

towing equipment

with removable coupling ball bar

All dimensions refer to factory-fitted

towing equipment.

Dimension mm

A 602

540

380

998

495

492.5

486.5

238

9 Warning

Only use towing equipment approved for

your vehicle. We recommend entrusting

retrofitting of towing equipment to a

workshop.

298 Index

Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............210

Accessories .......................................77, 232

Accessory socket ..................................... 94

Adaptive brake light .............................208

Adaptive Forward Lighting ..................132

Bulb replacement ...............................254

Driving abroad ...................................136

Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)

Bulb replacement ...............................254

Driving abroad ...................................136

Adjusting the incline

seats ...................................................... 49

Air conditioning system ......................... 140

Air intake ................................................ 166

Air outlet .................................................166

Air quality sensor ...................................157

Air recirculation system ........ 148, 153, 161

Air vents .................................................142

Airbags ..................................................... 81

Alarm ........................................................ 37

Alarm system ........................................... 35

Alternator ................................................. 99

Antenna ..................................................137

Anti-corrosion service ............................266

Antifreeze ...............................................270

Antifreeze protection ....................270, 275

Anti-knock quality of fuel ...................... 188

Octane number ..................................280

Anti-theft locking system ........................ 30

Anti-theft protection ............................... 16

Aquaplaning .......................................... 215

Armrest ..................................................... 56

Ashtray .............................................95, 135

Automatic air recirculation mode ........ 161

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror .... 41

Automatic transmission .......................... 14

Automatic mode ................................ 177

Driving programs ............................... 178

Fault .................................................... 182

Interruption of power supply ............ 183

Kickdown ............................................ 180

Manual mode ..................................... 178

Selector lever ........................14, 177, 178

Selector lever lock .............................. 177

Winter program ................................. 180

Automatic wiping ............................12, 127

Auxiliary heating ................................... 163

Programming ..................................... 164

Remote control .................................. 165

Battery ....................................185, 276, 293

Interruption of power supply ..... 44, 175,

183

Battery discharge protection ............... 136

Before starting off ................................... 15

Belt force limiters ..................................... 72

Belt tensioners ......................................... 72

Bleeding, diesel fuel system .................. 226

Board information display .................... 108

Bonnet .................................................... 226

Boot, see Luggage compartment .... 34, 65

Brake assist ............................................ 208

Brake light .............................................. 208

Brake system ........................................... 99

Brakes

ABS ..................................................... 210

Brake assist ........................................ 208

Brake fluid .......................................... 272

Brake lights ........................................ 255

Brake servo unit ................................. 184

Foot brake .......................................... 208

Hand brake ........................................ 209

Bulb replacement .................................. 249

Bulbs ....................................................... 249

Capacities ..............................294, 295, 296

Car Pass ................................................... 26

Caravan/trailer towing .......................... 184

Care ........................................................ 260

Catalytic converter ........................ 195, 227

CDC (Continuous Damping Control) ... 198

Central locking system ............................ 30

Centre console lighting ......................... 135

Changing the battery

Radio remote control ..........29, 165, 293

Changing tyre/wheel type .................... 211

Changing wheels ................................... 236

Chassis number, see vehicle identification

number ................................................. 279

Check control ................................... 20, 124

Child restraint system ............................. 77

Child safety locks .............................. 37, 43

Cigarette lighter .............................. 94, 135

Climate control ...................................... 140

Clutch operation .................................... 185

CO2 emissions ............................... 282, 283

299Index

Cold start ................................................185

Colour information display ................... 108

Continuous Damping Control (CDC) ....198

Contrast ..................................................119

Control indicator

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........ 210

Airbag ................................................... 86

Engine electronics .............................. 192

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ....196

Exhaust ...............................................192

Immobiliser ........................................... 27

Parking distance sensor .................... 203

Tyre pressure monitoring system .....207

Control indicators ..............................10, 98

Adaptive Forward Lighting .......104, 133

Belt tensioners ...................................... 73

Brake system ...................................... 209

Cruise control .....................................200

IDS+ .....................................................199

Cool box ................................................... 61

Coolant ...................................................270

Coolant level .......................................... 271

Coolant temperature display ...............106

Coolant thermometer ............................106

Cooled glove compartment .................. 143

Cooling ...........................................149, 154

Correcting time ..............................112, 118

Coupling socket load .............................222

Courtesy light ......................................... 134

Courtesy light delay ..............................134

Courtesy lights

Bulb replacement ...............................258

Cruise control .........................................200

Curtain airbags ........................................ 85

Curve lighting ..................................23, 132

Dashboard, see Instrument panel ........... 6

Data .................................................. 26, 278

Date ................................................110, 113

Daytime running lights .......................... 128

Decommissioning .................................. 277

Demisting and defrosting

Windows ............................................. 147

With air conditioning system ....150, 155

With climate control system ............. 159

Diesel fuel filter ...................................... 270

Diesel fuel system ..........................226, 270

Diesel particle filter ....... 102, 143, 185, 194

Dimensions ............................................. 296

Dipped beam ............................................. 7

Bulb replacement ......................250, 252

Display ....................................107, 108, 176

Display mode ......................................... 120

Door locks ........................................26, 262

Door-to-door light function .................. 133

Doors ...................................................... 100

Drink holders ............................................ 97

Driver’s seat with climate control ......... 144

Driving abroad ..............................188, 265

Headlights .......................................... 136

Toll system ......................................... 138

Driving hints ........................................... 184

Easytronic ........................................ 14, 168

Driving programs .............................. 171

fault .................................................... 174

Interruption of power supply ............ 175

Kickdown ............................................ 172

Selector lever ....................................... 14

Starting off ......................................... 170

Winter program ................................. 172

Economical driving ................................ 186

Electric seat adjustment ......................... 50

Electric sun roof ....................................... 45

Electric windows ...................................... 42

Electrical system ....................243, 276, 293

Electro-hydraulic

power assisted steering ......10, 103, 184

Electronic components .......................... 276

Electronic immobiliser ............................. 27

Electronic Stability Program ................. 196

Engine code ...........................279, 280, 281

Engine control indicator ....................... 192

Engine oil ............................................... 268

Engine oil change .................................. 269

Engine oil consumption ........................ 268

Engine oil filter ....................................... 269

Engine oil level ............................... 103, 268

Engine oil pressure .................................. 98

Engine speed ......................................... 185

Engine wash ........................................... 262

Environmental protection ............. 260, 269

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ....... 196

Exhaust control indicator ..................... 192

Exhaust gases ........................................ 193

300 Index

Exhaust system ......................................193

Exterior lighting switch-off delay .......... 133

Exterior mirrors .................................40, 143

Fan ......................................... 145, 152, 267

Filling station

Capacities ...................................294, 295

Engine oil level ................................... 268

Fuel .................................... 188, 280, 281

Opening the bonnet .......................... 226

Tyre pressure ..............................187, 288

Vehicle data .......................................279

Windscreen wash system ..................275

First-aid kit, ............................................ 232

Flat tyre .................................................. 239

Fog lights ................................................130

Bulb replacement ...............................255

Fog tail light ...........................................131

Bulb replacement ...............................255

Foot brake ..............................................208

Front passenger airbag .......................... 81

Fuel ........................................ 188, 280, 281

Fuel consumption ......... 186, 188, 282, 283

Fuel filter .................................................270

Fuel gauge ............................................. 106

Fuel level ................................................. 106

Fuel system, diesel .................................226

Fuses .......................................................243

Gears ........................................................ 14

Generator, see Alternator ....................... 99

Genuine Vauxhall

Parts and Accessories ....................... 267

Glove compartment ................................ 96

Glove compartment lighting ................ 135

Bulb replacement .............................. 259

Glovebox

Cooled ................................................ 143

Glow start switch ..................................... 15

Graphical information display ............. 108

Gross vehicle weight .............................. 285

Gross vehicle weight rating .................. 285

Halogen headlight system

Bulb replacement .............................. 250

Driving abroad ................................... 136

Hand brake ......................................16, 209

Hazard warning lights ....................11, 131

Head restraints ..................5, 19, 53, 54, 55

Headlight flash ...................................... 129

Headlight range adjustment ........131, 249

Headlight switch ........................7, 128, 129

Headlight wash system ...........12, 127, 275

Headlights .................................................. 7

Daytime running lights ...................... 128

Driving abroad ................................... 136

Fog lights ............................................ 130

Reversing lights .................................. 131

Heated exterior mirrors ................... 13, 143

Heated front seats ................................ 144

Heated rear seats .................................. 144

Heated rear window .......................13, 143

Heating ..................................140, 146, 154

Seats ................................................... 144

With air conditioning system .... 150, 155

With climate control system ............. 158

Height adjustment

Seat belts ............................................. 75

Steering wheel ........................................6

High-pressure cleaners .........221, 262, 263

Horn .......................................................... 11

Identification plate ................................ 278

IDS+ (Interactive Driving System) . 196, 198

Ignition logic .................................. 113, 120

Ignition switch ...................................... 6, 15

Ignition system .............................. 267, 276

Immobiliser .............................................. 27

Information display ............................... 108

Infotainment system ............................. 137

Inspection system .................................. 266

Instrument display ................................ 105

Instrument illumination ......................... 134

Bulb replacement .............................. 259

Instrument panel ........................................6

Instruments ..............................98, 105, 137

Interactive Driving System (IDS+) . 196, 198

Interior mirror ....................................... 5, 41

Universal remote control .................... 38

Interruption of power supply ..44, 122, 125

Easytronic ........................................... 175

Electric windows .................................. 44

Selector lever lock .............................. 183

ISOFIX ...................................................... 79

301Index

Jack .........................................................235

Jump starting .........................................228

Key

Extending ............................................. 26

Ignition lock ................................6, 15, 27

Locking doors ....................................... 30

Remove ................................................. 16

Starting the engine ..........................6, 15

Keys .......................................................... 26

Language selection .......................113, 118

Lashing eyes ............................................ 69

Leather trim ........................................... 262

Level control system ..............................204

Light switch ................................................ 7

Lighting ......................................7, 100, 128

Driving abroad ...................................136

Loading ....................................70, 222, 285

Loading the vehicle ................................. 70

Locking doors ......................................2, 30

Locking from the inside ........................... 31

Locks ....................................................... 262

Lubricants ......................................268, 279

Luggage compartment

Bulb replacement .............................. 259

Extension .............................................. 65

Lashing eyes ........................................ 69

Lighting .............................................. 135

Loading ................................70, 222, 285

Locking ................................................. 34

Luggage compartment cover ................ 67

Lumbar support ................................. 49, 51

Main beam ......................................... 7, 129

Bulb replacement ......................251, 253

Control indicator ................................ 101

Maintenance

Air conditioning system ..................... 167

Antifreeze protection ........................ 270

Brake fluid .......................................... 272

Brakes ................................................. 208

Catalytic converter ............................ 195

Engine oil ....................................268, 269

Fuel consumption .............................. 187

Tyre pressure ...................................... 213

Tyres ................................................... 214

Windscreen wipers ............................. 273

Manual transmission ............................... 14

Mirrors ............................................5, 40, 41

Misted windows .......................13, 147, 159

Mobile telephone ................................... 139

Motorway lighting ...........................23, 132

Muffler, see Exhaust system ................. 193

Neutral, transmission .............................. 14

Number plate lighting .......................... 257

Number plate lights

Bulb replacement .............................. 257

Number plates ....................................... 277

Octane numbers ............................ 188, 280

Odometer ............................................... 105

Oil change ............................................. 269

Oil consumption .................................... 268

Oil filter change ..................................... 269

Oil level ................................................... 268

Oil pressure .............................................. 98

Oils .......................................................... 268

Operating temperature ........................ 185

Outside temperature gauge ................ 109

Overrun .......................................... 185, 187

Paintwork damage ............................... 261

Parking ............................................. 16, 202

Parking distance sensor ........................ 202

Parking lamps .............................................7

Parking lighs

Bulb replacement .............................. 254

Parking lights ......................................... 134

Parking the vehicle .................................. 16

Parts ....................................................... 267

Pedals ..................................................... 185

Performance .................................. 282, 283

Petrol ......................................188, 280, 281

Pinking .................................................... 188

Pollen filter ............................................. 166

Position memory ......................6, 28, 40, 52

302 Index

Power assisted steering, see electro-

hydraulic power assisted steering ....184

Preheating ..............................................102

Pushing, towing .....................................227

Quickheat .............................. 146, 154, 158

Radio ......................................................137

Radio equipment (CB) ........................... 139

Radio reception ..................................... 137

Radio remote control

Auxiliary heating ................................165

Central locking system ........................ 28

Universal remote control ..................... 38

Rain sensor ................12, 44, 127, 260, 273

Reading lights ........................................135

Rear window

wash system ................ 12, 127, 260, 275

Refuelling ................................................189

Fuel filler cap ...................................... 188

Relays ..................................................... 243

Remote control

Auxiliary heating ................................165

Central locking system ........................ 28

Steering wheel ..............................21, 137

Universal remote control ..................... 38

Replacement keys ................................... 26

Reversing lights ......................................135

Bulb replacement ...............................255

Roof load ......................... 70, 184, 187, 285

Roof rack ............................... 187, 218, 285

Roof racks ......................................187, 285

Running-in .............................................. 184

Brakes ................................................. 208

Safeguard against unauthorised use 6, 16

Safety accessories ...........................77, 232

Safety net ................................................. 68

Saving energy ........................................ 186

Seat adjustment ......................3, 48, 50, 56

Seat belts ...................................71, 75, 262

Seat height adjustment ...................... 3, 49

Seat occupancy recognition ................... 87

Seat position ...................................... 50, 51

Seats .........................................3, 48, 49, 56

Extending the luggage compartment 65

Heated ................................................ 144

heated ................................................ 144

With climate control .......................... 144

Selector lever .......................................... 177

Selector lever lock ............................14, 177

Interruption of power supply ............ 183

Self-diagnosis ............................73, 86, 210

Self-help ................................................. 226

Automatic transmission .................... 183

Central locking system ........................ 33

Electric sun roof ................................... 47

Electric windows ................................... 44

Information display ........................... 110

Radio remote control .......................... 29

Service interval display ......................... 266

Service work ........................................... 266

Side airbags ............................................. 83

Signal system ........................................... 11

Spare fuses ............................................. 244

Spare keys ................................................ 26

Spare wheel ................................... 233, 236

Speed ............................................. 186, 187

Fuel consumption ...................... 186, 187

Speedometer ......................................... 105

Sport mode ..............................24, 101, 198

Starter switch ..............................................6

Starting the engine .......6, 15, 27, 169, 227

Self-help ............................................. 227

Steam-jet cleaners ................221, 262, 263

Steering column lock ........................... 6, 16

Steering wheel adjustment ........................6

Steering wheel remote control ....... 21, 137

Stowage compartments ............. 56, 96, 97

Sun blind .................................................. 47

Sun roof .................................................... 45

Sun shade .......................................... 46, 47

System settings .............................. 112, 117

Tables ....................................................... 62

Tachometer ........................................... 105

Tail lights ................................................ 128

Bulb replacement .............................. 255

Tailgate .................................................... 34

Tailgate wiper ....................................... 127

Tank

Fuel gauge ......................................... 106

Technical data ...................................... 278

Telephone, see Mobile telephone ........ 139

Temperature regulation ............... 145, 158

Temporary spare wheel ................ 217, 234

The first 600 miles / 1000 km ................ 184

Tightening torque ......................... 239, 288

303Index

Time ................................................110, 113

Toll systems ............................................138

Tools .......................................................235

Towing ....................................................230

Towing equipment ................................219

Towing eye .....................................230, 231

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) .................. 223

Transmission display ............................. 168

Transmission, automatic ......................... 14

Automatic mode ................................177

Driving programs ...............................178

Fault ....................................................182

Interruption of power supply ............ 183

Kickdown ............................................180

Selector lever ..............................177, 178

Selector lever lock ..............................177

Winter program .................................180

Transmission, Easytronic ....................... 168

Driving programs ...............................171

fault .....................................................174

Interruption of power supply ............ 175

Kickdown ............................................172

Selector lever ................................14, 170

Winter program .................................172

Transmission, manual ............................. 14

Travel Assistant .................................23, 58

Tread depth ...........................................214

Trip computer ..........................20, 114, 120

Trip odometer ........................................105

Triple information display .....................108

TSA (Trailer Stability Assist) ..................223

Turn lighting .....................................23, 132

Turn signal lights ....................................... 7

Turn signals

Bulb replacement .............................. 255

Twin Audio .......................................21, 138

Tyre chains .....................................217, 288

Tyre condition ........................................ 214

Tyre pressure .........................204, 213, 288

Tyre pressure monitoring system ......... 204

Tyre repair kit ........................................ 239

Units of measure ...........................113, 119

Unleaded fuel ........................188, 190, 280

Used oil ................................................... 269

Valve cap key ........................................ 213

Vauxhall alarm system ........................... 35

Vauxhall Service .................................... 264

Vehicle care ........................................... 260

Vehicle decommissioning ..................... 277

Vehicle identification number .............. 279

Vehicle keys, see Keys ............................. 26

Vehicle recommissioning ...................... 277

Vehicle tools ........................................... 235

Ventilation ..................... 140, 146, 153, 160

Warning buzzers ................................... 126

Warning messages ................................ 116

Warning triangle, .................................. 232

Wash fluid reservoir, windscreen

wash system ....................................... 275

Weights .................................................. 285

Wheels .................................................... 211

Wheels, tyres .......................................... 211

Windows

Demisting and defrosting. 150, 155, 159

Windscreen wash system ................ 12, 127

Wash fluid reservoir ........................... 275

Windscreen washer system .................. 127

Antifreeze protection ........................ 275

Windscreen wipers ..................11, 126, 273

Winter mode

Starting-off aid .................................. 172

Winter operation

Battery ................................................ 185

Coolant, antifreeze ............................ 270

Fuel consumption .............................. 187

Fuel for diesel engines ...................... 188

Heating ..............................140, 150, 155

Locks .................................................. 262

Tyre chains ................................. 217, 288

Window demisting and defrosting ... 147

Windscreen wash system, antifreeze pro-

tection ................................................ 275

Winter program ..................................... 172

Winter tyres .................................... 216, 288

Xenon headlight system

Bulb replacement .............................. 252

Driving abroad .................................. 136

304 Index

SIGNUM

Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts,

is not permitted without prior written consent from

Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly

reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this

manual are based on the latest production information

available at the time of publication.

The right is reserved to make changes at any time without

notice.

Edition: July 2007.

TS 1577-A-08

SIGNUM

Operation, Safety and Maintenance

Owner’s Manual

Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

First, read the manual;
Check if your question has been asked previously;
Try to ask your question as clearly as possible;
Did you already try to solve the problem? Please mention this;
Is your problem solved by a visitor then let him/her know in this forum;
To give a response to a question or answer, do not use this form but click on the button 'reply to this question';
Your question will be posted here and emailed to our subscribers. Therefore, avoid filling in personal details.

new questions and answers
new manuals

You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.

Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Vauxhall Signum 2007 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 4,37 mb in size.

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Vauxhall Signum 2007

Vauxhall Signum 2007 Quick start guide - English - 2 pages

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.

Info

Vauxhall Signum 2007 Manual

Product: